Organic electroluminescent element emitting light at high luminous efficiency and electronic device

ABSTRACT

An organic electroluminescence device includes: a first emitting layer disposed between an anode and a cathode; a second emitting layer disposed between the first emitting layer and the cathode; and an electron blocking layer disposed between the first emitting layer and the anode, in which the first emitting layer and the second emitting layer are in direct contact with each other; the first emitting layer and the electron blocking layer are in direct contact with each other; the first emitting layer includes a first compound represented by a formula (1) below; the first compound includes at least one group represented by a formula (11) below; the second emitting layer includes a second compound represented by a formula (2); the electron blocking layer includes a third compound; and the third compound satisfies a formula (M1) below.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

The present application is a Continuation of U.S. patent applicationSer. No. 17/461,842, filed on Aug. 30, 2022, which claims priority toApplication No. PCT/JP2020/041598 filed on Nov. 6, 2020, whichapplication claims priority to Japanese Application No. 2019-203327,filed on Nov. 8, 2019. The entire contents of the above applications areincorporated herein by reference in their entireties.

TECHNICAL FIELD

The present invention relates to an organic electroluminescence deviceand an electronic device.

BACKGROUND ART

An organic electroluminescence device (hereinafter, occasionallyreferred to as “organic EL device”) has found its application in afull-color display for mobile phones, televisions and the like. When avoltage is applied to an organic EL device, holes are injected from ananode and electrons are injected from a cathode into an emitting layer.The injected electrons and holes are recombined in the emitting layer toform excitons. Specifically, according to the electron spin statisticstheory, singlet excitons and triplet excitons are generated at a ratioof 25%:75%.

Various studies have been made for compounds to be used for the organicEL device in order to enhance the performance of the organic EL device.The performance of the organic EL device is evaluable in terms of, forinstance, luminance, emission wavelength, chromaticity, luminousefficiency, drive voltage, and lifetime.

For example, Patent Literature 1 describes an organicelectroluminescence device including: an emitting layer containing apyrene derivative as a host material and provided close to an anode; andan emitting layer containing an anthracene derivative as a host materialand provided close to a cathode.

For example, Patent Literature 2 describes an organicelectroluminescence device including: an emitting layer containing apyrene derivative and provided close to an anode; and an emitting layercontaining on an anthracene derivative and provided close to a cathode.

CITATION LIST

PATENT LITERATURE(S)

-   Patent Literature 1: JP No. 2019-161218-   Patent Literature 2: JP No. 2007-294261

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Problems to be Solved by the Invention

An object of the invention is to provide an organic electroluminescencedevice that emits light at high luminous efficiency and an electronicdevice including the organic electroluminescence device.

Means for Solving the Problems

According to an aspect of the invention, an organic electroluminescencedevice includes: an anode; a cathode; a first emitting layer disposedbetween the anode and the cathode; a second emitting layer disposedbetween the first emitting layer and the cathode; and an electronblocking layer disposed between the first emitting layer and the anode,in which: the first emitting layer and the second emitting layer are indirect contact with each other; the first emitting layer and theelectron blocking layer are in direct contact with each other; the firstemitting layer includes a first host material in a form of a firstcompound represented by a formula (1) below; the first compound includesat least one group represented by a formula (11) below; the secondemitting layer includes a second host material in a form of a secondcompound represented by a formula (2) below; the electron blocking layerincludes a third compound; and an ionization potential Ip(HT) of thethird compound satisfies a numerical formula (M1) below,

In the formula (1):

-   -   R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon        atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by        —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group        having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or the group represented by the        formula (11);    -   at least one of R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ is the group represented by the        formula (11); when a plurality of groups represented by the        formula (11) are present, the plurality of groups represented by        the formula (11) are mutually the same or different;    -   L₁₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted arylene        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring        atoms;    -   Ar₁₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mx is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5;    -   when two or more L₁₀₁ are present, the two or more L₁₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more Ar₁₀₁ are present, the two or more Ar₁₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   * in the formula (11) represents a bonding position to a pyrene        ring represented by the formula (1).

In the formula (2):

-   -   R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a substituted or        unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, a group        represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by —COOR₈₀₂, a        halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms;    -   L₂₀₁ and L₂₀₂ are each independently a single bond, a        substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; and    -   Ar₂₀₁ and Ar₂₀₂ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

In the first compound represented by the formula (1) and the secondcompound represented by the formula (2), R₉₀₁, R₉₀₂, R₉₀₃, R₉₀₄, R₉₀₅,R₉₀₆, R₉₀₇, R₈₀₁ and R₈₀₂ are each independently a hydrogen atom, asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, asubstituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ringcarbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 50 ring atoms;

-   -   when a plurality of R₉₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₂ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₃ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₄ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₄ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₅ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₅ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₆ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₆ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₇ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₇ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and when a plurality of R₈₀₂ are        present, the plurality of R₈₀₂ are mutually the same or        different.

According to another aspect of the invention, an organicelectroluminescence device includes: an anode; a cathode; a firstemitting layer disposed between the anode and the cathode; a secondemitting layer disposed between the first emitting layer and thecathode; and an electron blocking layer disposed between the firstemitting layer and the anode, in which: the first emitting layer and thesecond emitting layer are in direct contact with each other; the firstemitting layer and the electron blocking layer are in direct contactwith each other; the first emitting layer includes a first host materialin a form of a first compound represented by a formula (1) below; thefirst compound includes at least one group represented by a formula (11)below; the second emitting layer includes a second host material in aform of a second compound represented by a formula (2) below; theelectron blocking layer includes a third compound; the third compound isat least one compound selected from the group consisting of a compoundrepresented by a formula (31) below and a compound represented by aformula (32) below; when the third compound is represented by a formula(31) below and includes two substituted or unsubstituted amino groups,nitrogen atoms of the two substituted or unsubstituted amino groups arelinked to each other by a substituted or unsubstituted arylene grouphaving 13 to 50 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituteddivalent heterocyclic group having 13 to 50 ring atoms; and when thecompound represented by the formula (31) includes a 4-dibenzofuranstructure in a molecule, the 4-dibenzofuran structure is one in number.

In the formula (1):

-   -   R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon        atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by        —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group        having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or the group represented by the        formula (11);    -   at least one of R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ is the group represented by the        formula (11); when a plurality of groups represented by the        formula (11) are present, the plurality of groups represented by        the formula (11) are mutually the same or different;    -   L₁₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted arylene        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring        atoms;    -   Ar₁₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mx is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5; and    -   when two or more L₁₀₁ are present, the two or more L₁₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more Ar₁₀₁ are present, the two or more Ar₁₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   * in the formula (11) represents a bonding position to a pyrene        ring represented by the formula (1).

In the formula (2):

-   -   R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a substituted or        unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, a group        represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by —COOR₈₀₂, a        halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms;    -   L₂₀₁ and L₂₀₂ are each independently a single bond, a        substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; and    -   Ar₂₀₁ and Ar₂₀₂ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

In the formula (31):

-   -   L_(A), L_(B), and L_(C) are each independently a single bond, or        a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 18 ring        carbon atoms;    -   A, B, and C are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 30        ring atoms, or a group represented by —Si(R′₉₀₁)(R′₉₀₂)(R′₉₀₃);    -   R′₉₀₁ to R′₉₀₃ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms;    -   when a plurality of R′₉₀₁ are present, the plurality of R′₉₀₁        are mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R′₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R′₉₀₂        are mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R′₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R′₉₀₃        are mutually the same or different; and    -   a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 30        ring atoms as A, B and C is each independently at least one        group selected from the group consisting of groups represented        by the formulae (31A), (31B), (31C), (31D), (31E) and (31F).

In the formulae (31A), (31B), (31C), (31 D), (31E) and (31 F):

-   -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₃₀₁ to R₃₀₉        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₃₁₀ to R₃₁₄        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₃₂₀ to R₃₂₄        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   R₃₀₁ to R₃₀₉, R₃₁₀, R₃₁₁ to R₃₁₄, R₃₂₀ and R₃₂₁ to R₃₂₄ neither        forming the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring nor        forming the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring are each        independently a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a        halogen atom, a nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   p1 is 3, and a plurality of R₃₁₀ are mutually the same or        different;    -   p2 is 3, and a plurality of R₃₂₀ are mutually the same or        different; and    -   * in the formulae (31A), (31B), (31C), (31D), (31E) and (31F) is        each independently bonded to any of L_(A), L_(B), and L_(C).

In the formula (32):

-   -   A₄₁ and A₄₂ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 30        ring atoms;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₄₁₀ to R₄₁₄        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₄₂₀ to R₄₂₄        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   R₄₁₀ to R₄₁₄ and R₄₂₀ to R₄₂₄ neither forming the substituted or        unsubstituted monocyclic ring nor forming the substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring are each independently a hydrogen atom,        a cyano group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having        1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl        group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50        ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃),        a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a halogen atom, a nitro group,        a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   m1 is 3, and three R₄₁₀ are mutually the same or different;    -   m2 is 3, and three R₄₂₀ are mutually the same or different; and    -   L₄₁ and L₄₂ are each independently a single bond, a substituted        or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms,        or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group        having 5 to 30 ring atoms.

In the first compound represented by the formula (1), the secondcompound represented by the formula (2), and the third compoundrepresented by the formula (31) or (32), R₉₀₁, R₉₀₂, R₉₀₃, R₉₀₄, R₉₀₅,R₉₀₆, R₉₀₇, R₈₀₁ and R₈₀₂ are each independently a hydrogen atom, asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, asubstituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ringcarbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 50 ring atoms;

-   -   when a plurality of R₉₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₂ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₃ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₄ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₄ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₅ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₅ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₆ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₆ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₇ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₇ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and when a plurality of R₈₀₂ are        present, the plurality of R₈₀₂ are mutually the same or        different.

According to still another aspect of the invention, an organicelectroluminescence device includes: an anode; a cathode; a firstemitting layer disposed between the anode and the cathode; a secondemitting layer disposed between the first emitting layer and thecathode; and an electron blocking layer disposed between the firstemitting layer and the anode, in which: the first emitting layer and thesecond emitting layer are in direct contact with each other; the firstemitting layer and the electron blocking layer are in direct contactwith each other; the first emitting layer includes a first hostmaterial; the second emitting layer includes a second host material; thefirst host material is different from the second host material; thefirst emitting layer at least includes a compound that emits lighthaving a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less; the second emittinglayer at least includes a compound that emits light having a maximumpeak wavelength of 500 nm or less; the compound that emits light havingthe maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less and is contained in thefirst emitting layer and the compound that emits light having themaximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less and is contained in the secondemitting layer are mutually the same or different; a triplet energyT₁(H1) of the first host material and a triplet energy T₁(H2) of thesecond host material satisfy a relationship of a numerical formula(Numerical Formula 1A) below; the electron blocking layer includes athird compound; and an ionization potential Ip(HT) of the third compoundsatisfies a numerical formula (M1) below,

T ₁(H1)>T ₁(H2)  (Numerical Formula 1A)

Ip(HT)≥5.67 eV  (M1).

According to yet another aspect of the invention, an organicelectroluminescence device includes: an anode; a cathode; a firstemitting layer disposed between the anode and the cathode; a secondemitting layer disposed between the first emitting layer and thecathode; and an electron blocking layer disposed between the firstemitting layer and the anode, in which: the first emitting layer and thesecond emitting layer are in direct contact with each other; the firstemitting layer and the electron blocking layer are in direct contactwith each other; the first emitting layer includes a first hostmaterial; the second emitting layer includes a second host material; thefirst host material is different from the second host material; thefirst emitting layer at least includes a compound that emits lighthaving a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less; the second emittinglayer at least includes a compound that emits light having a maximumpeak wavelength of 500 nm or less; the compound that emits light havingthe maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less and is contained in thefirst emitting layer and the compound that emits light having themaximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less and is contained in the secondemitting layer are mutually the same or different; a triplet energyT₁(H1) of the first host material and a triplet energy T₁(H2) of thesecond host material satisfy a relationship of a numerical formula(Numerical Formula 1A) below; the electron blocking layer includes athird compound; the third compound is at least one compound selectedfrom the group consisting of a compound represented by the formula (31)and a compound represented by the formula (32); when the third compoundis represented by the formula (31) and has two substituted orunsubstituted amino groups, nitrogen atoms of the two substituted orunsubstituted amino groups are linked to each other by a substituted orunsubstituted arylene group having 13 to 50 ring carbon atoms or asubstituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 13 to 50ring atoms; when the compound represented by the formula (31) includes a4-dibenzofuran structure in a molecule, the 4-dibenzofuran structure isone in number.

According to a further aspect of the invention, an electronic deviceprovided with the organic electroluminescence device according to theabove aspect of the invention is provided.

According to the above aspects of the invention, an organicelectroluminescence device that emits light at high luminous efficiencycan be provided. According to a still further aspect of the invention,an electronic device including the organic electroluminescence devicecan be provided.

BRIEF EXPLANATION OF DRAWING(S)

The FIGURE schematically shows an exemplary arrangement of an organicelectroluminescence device according to an exemplary embodiment of theinvention.

DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS Definitions

Herein, a hydrogen atom includes isotope having different numbers ofneutrons, specifically, protium, deuterium and tritium.

In chemical formulae herein, it is assumed that a hydrogen atom (i.e.protium, deuterium and tritium) is bonded to each of bondable positionsthat are not annexed with signs “R” or the like or “D” representing adeuterium.

Herein, the ring carbon atoms refer to the number of carbon atoms amongatoms forming a ring of a compound (e.g., a monocyclic compound,fused-ring compound, crosslinking compound, carbon ring compound, andheterocyclic compound) in which the atoms are bonded with each other toform the ring. When the ring is substituted by a substituent(s), carbonatom(s) contained in the substituent(s) is not counted in the ringcarbon atoms. Unless otherwise specified, the same applies to the “ringcarbon atoms” described later. For instance, a benzene ring has 6 ringcarbon atoms, a naphthalene ring has 10 ring carbon atoms, a pyridinering has 5 ring carbon atoms, and a furan ring has 4 ring carbon atoms.Further, for instance, 9,9-diphenylfluorenyl group has 13 ring carbonatoms and 9,9′-spirobifluorenyl group has 25 ring carbon atoms.

When a benzene ring is substituted by a substituent in a form of, forinstance, an alkyl group, the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl groupis not counted in the number of the ring carbon atoms of the benzenering. Accordingly, the benzene ring substituted by an alkyl group has 6ring carbon atoms. When a naphthalene ring is substituted by asubstituent in a form of, for instance, an alkyl group, the number ofcarbon atoms of the alkyl group is not counted in the number of the ringcarbon atoms of the naphthalene ring. Accordingly, the naphthalene ringsubstituted by an alkyl group has 10 ring carbon atoms.

Herein, the ring atoms refer to the number of atoms forming a ring of acompound (e.g., a monocyclic compound, fused-ring compound, crosslinkingcompound, carbon ring compound, and heterocyclic compound) in which theatoms are bonded to each other to form the ring (e.g., monocyclic ring,fused ring, and ring assembly). Atom(s) not forming the ring (e.g.,hydrogen atom(s) for saturating the valence of the atom which forms thering) and atom(s) in a substituent by which the ring is substituted arenot counted as the ring atoms. Unless otherwise specified, the sameapplies to the “ring atoms” described later. For instance, a pyridinering has 6 ring atoms, a quinazoline ring has 10 ring atoms, and a furanring has 5 ring atoms. For instance, the number of hydrogen atom(s)bonded to a pyridine ring or the number of atoms forming a substituentare not counted as the pyridine ring atoms. Accordingly, a pyridine ringbonded with a hydrogen atom(s) or a substituent(s) has 6 ring atoms. Forinstance, the hydrogen atom(s) bonded to a quinazoline ring or the atomsforming a substituent are not counted as the quinazoline ring atoms.Accordingly, a quinazoline ring bonded with hydrogen atom(s) or asubstituent(s) has 10 ring atoms.

Herein, “XX to YY carbon atoms” in the description of “substituted orunsubstituted ZZ group having XX to YY carbon atoms” represent carbonatoms of an unsubstituted ZZ group and do not include carbon atoms of asubstituent(s) of the substituted ZZ group. Herein, “YY” is larger than“XX,” “XX” representing an integer of 1 or more and “YY” representing aninteger of 2 or more.

Herein, “XX to YY atoms” in the description of “substituted orunsubstituted ZZ group having XX to YY atoms” represent atoms of anunsubstituted ZZ group and does not include atoms of a substituent(s) ofthe substituted ZZ group. Herein, “YY” is larger than “XX,” “XX”representing an integer of 1 or more and “YY” representing an integer of2 or more.

Herein, an unsubstituted ZZ group refers to an “unsubstituted ZZ group”in a “substituted or unsubstituted ZZ group,” and a substituted ZZ grouprefers to a “substituted ZZ group” in a “substituted or unsubstituted ZZgroup.”

Herein, the term “unsubstituted” used in a “substituted or unsubstitutedZZ group” means that a hydrogen atom(s) in the ZZ group is notsubstituted with a substituent(s). The hydrogen atom(s) in the“unsubstituted ZZ group” is protium, deuterium, or tritium.

Herein, the term “substituted” used in a “substituted or unsubstitutedZZ group” means that at least one hydrogen atom in the ZZ group issubstituted with a substituent. Similarly, the term “substituted” usedin a “BB group substituted by AA group” means that at least one hydrogenatom in the BB group is substituted with the AA group.

Substituents Mentioned Herein

Substituents mentioned herein will be described below.

An “unsubstituted aryl group” mentioned herein has, unless otherwisespecified herein, 6 to 50, preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 18ring carbon atoms.

An “unsubstituted heterocyclic group” mentioned herein has, unlessotherwise specified herein, 5 to 50, preferably 5 to 30, more preferably5 to 18 ring atoms.

An “unsubstituted alkyl group” mentioned herein has, unless otherwisespecified herein, 1 to 50, preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 6carbon atoms.

An “unsubstituted alkenyl group” mentioned herein has, unless otherwisespecified herein, 2 to 50, preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 6carbon atoms.

An “unsubstituted alkynyl group” mentioned herein has, unless otherwisespecified herein, 2 to 50, preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 6carbon atoms.

An “unsubstituted cycloalkyl group” mentioned herein has, unlessotherwise specified herein, 3 to 50, preferably 3 to 20, more preferably3 to 6 ring carbon atoms.

An “unsubstituted arylene group” mentioned herein has, unless otherwisespecified herein, 6 to 50, preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 18ring carbon atoms.

An “unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group” mentioned herein has,unless otherwise specified herein, 5 to 50, preferably 5 to 30, morepreferably 5 to 18 ring atoms.

An “unsubstituted alkylene group” mentioned herein has, unless otherwisespecified herein, 1 to 50, preferably 1 to 20, more preferably 1 to 6carbon atoms.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Aryl Group

Specific examples (specific example group G1) of the “substituted orunsubstituted aryl group” mentioned herein include unsubstituted arylgroups (specific example group G1A) below and substituted aryl groups(specific example group G1B). (Herein, an unsubstituted aryl grouprefers to an “unsubstituted aryl group” in a “substituted orunsubstituted aryl group,” and a substituted aryl group refers to a“substituted aryl group” in a “substituted or unsubstituted aryl group.”A simply termed “aryl group” herein includes both of an “unsubstitutedaryl group” and a “substituted aryl group.”)

The “substituted aryl group” refers to a group derived by substitutingat least one hydrogen atom in an “unsubstituted aryl group” with asubstituent. Examples of the “substituted aryl group” include a groupderived by substituting at least one hydrogen atom in the “unsubstitutedaryl group” in the specific example group G1A below with a substituent,and examples of the substituted aryl group in the specific example groupG1B below. It should be noted that the examples of the “unsubstitutedaryl group” and the “substituted aryl group” mentioned herein are merelyexemplary, and the “substituted aryl group” mentioned herein includes agroup derived by further substituting a hydrogen atom bonded to a carbonatom of a skeleton of a “substituted aryl group” in the specific examplegroup G1B below, and a group derived by further substituting a hydrogenatom of a substituent of the “substituted aryl group” in the specificexample group G1B below.

Unsubstituted Aryl Group (Specific Example Group G1A):

a phenyl group, p-biphenyl group, m-biphenyl group, o-biphenyl group,p-terphenyl-4-yl group, p-terphenyl-3-yl group, p-terphenyl-2-yl group,m-terphenyl-4-yl group, m-terphenyl-3-yl group, m-terphenyl-2-yl group,o-terphenyl-4-yl group, o-terphenyl-3-yl group, o-terphenyl-2-yl group,1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, anthryl group, benzanthryl group,phenanthryl group, benzophenanthryl group, phenalenyl group, pyrenylgroup, chrysenyl group, benzochrysenyl group, triphenylenyl group,benzotriphenylenyl group, tetracenyl group, pentacenyl group, fluorenylgroup, 9,9′-spirobifluorenyl group, benzofluorenyl group,dibenzofluorenyl group, fluoranthenyl group, benzofluoranthenyl group, aperylenyl group, and a monovalent aryl group derived by removing onehydrogen atom from cyclic structures represented by formulae (TEMP-1) to(TEMP-15) below.

Substituted Aryl Group (Specific Example Group G1B):

o-tolyl group, m-tolyl group, p-tolyl group, para-xylyl group,meta-xylyl group, ortho-xylyl group, para-isopropylphenyl group,meta-isopropylphenyl group, ortho-isopropylphenyl group,para-t-butylphenyl group, meta-t-butylphenyl group, ortho-t-butylphenylgroup, 3,4,5-trimethylphenyl group, 9,9-dimethylfluorenyl group,9,9-diphenylfluorenyl group, 9,9-bis(4-methylphenyl)fluorenyl group,9,9-bis(4-isopropylphenyl)fluorenyl group,9,9-bis(4-t-butylphenyl)fluorenyl group, cyanophenyl group,triphenylsilylphenyl group, trimethylsilylphenyl group, phenylnaphthylgroup, naphthylphenyl group, and a group derived by substituting atleast one hydrogen atom of a monovalent group derived from the cyclicstructures represented by the formulae (TEMP-1) to (TEMP-15) with asubstituent.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Heterocyclic Group

The “heterocyclic group” mentioned herein refers to a cyclic grouphaving at least one hetero atom in the ring atoms. Specific examples ofthe hetero atom include a nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom,silicon atom, phosphorus atom, and boron atom.

The “heterocyclic group” mentioned herein is a monocyclic group or afused-ring group.

The “heterocyclic group” mentioned herein is an aromatic heterocyclicgroup or a non-aromatic heterocyclic group.

Specific examples (specific example group G2) of the “substituted orunsubstituted heterocyclic group” mentioned herein include unsubstitutedheterocyclic groups (specific example group G2A) and substitutedheterocyclic groups (specific example group G2B). (Herein, anunsubstituted heterocyclic group refers to an “unsubstitutedheterocyclic group” in a “substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclicgroup,” and a substituted heterocyclic group refers to a “substitutedheterocyclic group” in a “substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclicgroup.” A simply termed “heterocyclic group” herein includes both of“unsubstituted heterocyclic group” and “substituted heterocyclicgroup.”)

The “substituted heterocyclic group” refers to a group derived bysubstituting at least one hydrogen atom in an “unsubstitutedheterocyclic group” with a substituent. Specific examples of the“substituted heterocyclic group” include a group derived by substitutingat least one hydrogen atom in the “unsubstituted heterocyclic group” inthe specific example group G2A below with a substituent, and examples ofthe substituted heterocyclic group in the specific example group G2Bbelow. It should be noted that the examples of the “unsubstitutedheterocyclic group” and the “substituted heterocyclic group” mentionedherein are merely exemplary, and the “substituted heterocyclic group”mentioned herein includes a group derived by further substituting ahydrogen atom bonded to a ring atom of a skeleton of a “substitutedheterocyclic group” in the specific example group G2B below, and a groupderived by further substituting a hydrogen atom of a substituent of the“substituted heterocyclic group” in the specific example group G2Bbelow.

The specific example group G2A includes, for instance, unsubstitutedheterocyclic groups including a nitrogen atom (specific example groupG2A1) below, unsubstituted heterocyclic groups including an oxygen atom(specific example group G2A2) below, unsubstituted heterocyclic groupsincluding a sulfur atom (specific example group G2A3) below, andmonovalent heterocyclic groups (specific example group G2A4) derived byremoving a hydrogen atom from cyclic structures represented by formulae(TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33) below.

The specific example group G2B includes, for instance, substitutedheterocyclic groups including a nitrogen atom (specific example groupG2B1) below, substituted heterocyclic groups including an oxygen atom(specific example group G2B2) below, substituted heterocyclic groupsincluding a sulfur atom (specific example group G2B3) below, and groupsderived by substituting at least one hydrogen atom of the monovalentheterocyclic groups (specific example group G2B4) derived from thecyclic structures represented by formulae (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33) below.

Unsubstituted Heterocyclic Groups Including Nitrogen Atom (SpecificExample Group G2A1):

pyrrolyl group, imidazolyl group, pyrazolyl group, triazolyl group,tetrazolyl group, oxazolyl group, isoxazolyl group, oxadiazolyl group,thiazolyl group, isothiazolyl group, thiadiazolyl group, a pyridylgroup, pyridazynyl group, a pyrimidinyl group, pyrazinyl group, atriazinyl group, indolyl group, isoindolyl group, indolizinyl group,quinolizinyl group, quinolyl group, isoquinolyl group, cinnolyl group,phthalazinyl group, quinazolinyl group, quinoxalinyl group,benzimidazolyl group, indazolyl group, phenanthrolinyl group,phenanthridinyl group, acridinyl group, phenazinyl group, a carbazolylgroup, benzocarbazolyl group, morpholino group, phenoxazinyl group,phenothiazinyl group, azacarbazolyl group, and diazacarbazolyl group.

Unsubstituted Heterocyclic Groups Including Oxygen Atom (SpecificExample Group G2A2):

furyl group, oxazolyl group, isoxazolyl group, oxadiazolyl group,xanthenyl group, benzofuranyl group, isobenzofuranyl group,dibenzofuranyl group, naphthobenzofuranyl group, benzoxazolyl group,benzisoxazolyl group, phenoxazinyl group, morpholino group,dinaphthofuranyl group, azadibenzofuranyl group, diazadibenzofuranylgroup, azanaphthobenzofuranyl group, and diazanaphthobenzofuranyl group.

Unsubstituted Heterocyclic Groups Including Sulfur Atom (SpecificExample Group G2A3):

thienyl group, thiazolyl group, isothiazolyl group, thiadiazolyl group,benzothiophenyl group (benzothienyl group), isobenzothiophenyl group(isobenzothienyl group), dibenzothiophenyl group (dibenzothienyl group),naphthobenzothiophenyl group (nahthobenzothienyl group), benzothiazolylgroup, benzisothiazolyl group, phenothiazinyl group, dinaphthothiophenylgroup (dinaphthothienyl group), azadibenzothiophenyl group(azadibenzothienyl group), diazadibenzothiophenyl group(diazadibenzothienyl group), azanaphthobenzothiophenyl group(azanaphthobenzothienyl group), and diazanaphthobenzothiophenyl group(diazanaphthobenzothienyl group).Monovalent Heterocyclic Groups Derived by Removing One Hydrogen Atomfrom Cyclic Structures Represented by Formulae (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33)(Specific Example Group G2A4):

In the formulae (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33), X_(A) and Y_(A) are eachindependently an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, NH, or CH₂. However, atleast one of X_(A) and Y_(A) is an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NH.

When at least one of X_(A) and Y_(A) in the formulae (TEMP-16) to(TEMP-33) is NH or CH₂, the monovalent heterocyclic groups derived fromthe cyclic structures represented by the formulae (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33)include a monovalent group derived by removing one hydrogen atom fromNH, or CH₂.

Substituted Heterocyclic Groups Including Nitrogen Atom (SpecificExample Group G2B1):

(9-phenyl)carbazolyl group, (9-biphenylyl)carbazolyl group,(9-phenyl)phenylcarbazolyl group, (9-naphthyl)carbazolyl group,diphenylcarbazole-9-yl group, phenylcarbazole-9-yl group,methylbenzimidazolyl group, ethylbenzimidazolyl group, phenyltriazinylgroup, biphenylyltriazinyl group, diphenyltriazinyl group,phenylquinazolinyl group, and biphenylquinazolinyl group.

Substituted Heterocyclic Groups Including Oxygen Atom (Specific ExampleGroup G2B2):

phenyldibenzofuranyl group, methyldibenzofuranyl group,t-butyldibenzofuranyl group, and monovalent residue ofspiro[9H-xanthene-9,9′-[9H]fluorene].

Substituted Heterocyclic Groups Including Sulfur Atom (Specific ExampleGroup G2B3):

phenyldibenzothiophenyl group, methyldibenzothiophenyl group,t-butyldibenzothiophenyl group, and monovalent residue ofspiro[9H-thioxanthene-9,9′-[9H]fluorene].Groups Obtained by Substituting at Least One Hydrogen Atom of MonovalentHeterocyclic Group Derived from Cyclic Structures Represented byFormulae (TEMP-16) to (TEMP-33) with Substituent (Specific Example GroupG2B4):

The “at least one hydrogen atom of a monovalent heterocyclic group”means at least one hydrogen atom selected from a hydrogen atom bonded toa ring carbon atom of the monovalent heterocyclic group, a hydrogen atombonded to a nitrogen atom of at least one of X_(A) or Y_(A) in a form ofNH, and a hydrogen atom of one of X_(A) and Y_(A) in a form of amethylene group (CH₂).

Substituted or Unsubstituted Alkyl Group

Specific examples (specific example group G3) of the “substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group” mentioned herein include unsubstituted alkylgroups (specific example group G3A) and substituted alkyl groups(specific example group G3B below). (Herein, an unsubstituted alkylgroup refers to an “unsubstituted alkyl group” in a “substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group,” and a substituted alkyl group refers to a“substituted alkyl group” in a “substituted or unsubstituted alkylgroup.” A simply termed “alkyl group” herein includes both of“unsubstituted alkyl group” and “substituted alkyl group.”)

The “substituted alkyl group” refers to a group derived by substitutingat least one hydrogen atom in an “unsubstituted alkyl group” with asubstituent. Specific examples of the “substituted alkyl group” includea group derived by substituting at least one hydrogen atom of an“unsubstituted alkyl group” (specific example group G3A) below with asubstituent, and examples of the substituted alkyl group (specificexample group G3B) below. Herein, the alkyl group for the “unsubstitutedalkyl group” refers to a chain alkyl group. Accordingly, the“unsubstituted alkyl group” include linear “unsubstituted alkyl group”and branched “unsubstituted alkyl group.” It should be noted that theexamples of the “unsubstituted alkyl group” and the “substituted alkylgroup” mentioned herein are merely exemplary, and the “substituted alkylgroup” mentioned herein includes a group derived by further substitutinga hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom of a skeleton of the“substituted alkyl group” in the specific example group G3B, and a groupderived by further substituting a hydrogen atom of a substituent of the“substituted alkyl group” in the specific example group G3B.

Unsubstituted Alkyl Group (Specific Example Group G3A):

methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butylgroup, isobutyl group, s-butyl group, and t-butyl group.

Substituted Alkyl Group (Specific Example Group G3B):

heptafluoropropyl group (including isomer thereof), pentafluoroethylgroup, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl group, and trifluoromethyl group.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Alkenyl Group

Specific examples (specific example group G4) of the “substituted orunsubstituted alkenyl group” mentioned herein include unsubstitutedalkenyl groups (specific example group G4A) and substituted alkenylgroups (specific example group G4B). (Herein, an unsubstituted alkenylgroup refers to an “unsubstituted alkenyl group” in a “substituted orunsubstituted alkenyl group,” and a substituted alkenyl group refers toa “substituted alkenyl group” in a “substituted or unsubstituted alkenylgroup.” A simply termed “alkenyl group” herein includes both of“unsubstituted alkenyl group” and “substituted alkenyl group.”)

The “substituted alkenyl group” refers to a group derived bysubstituting at least one hydrogen atom in an “unsubstituted alkenylgroup” with a substituent. Specific examples of the “substituted alkenylgroup” include an “unsubstituted alkenyl group” (specific example groupG4A) substituted by a substituent, and examples of the substitutedalkenyl group (specific example group G4B) below. It should be notedthat the examples of the “unsubstituted alkenyl group” and the“substituted alkenyl group” mentioned herein are merely exemplary, andthe “substituted alkenyl group” mentioned herein includes a groupderived by further substituting a hydrogen atom of a skeleton of the“substituted alkenyl group” in the specific example group G4B with asubstituent, and a group derived by further substituting a hydrogen atomof a substituent of the “substituted alkenyl group” in the specificexample group G4B with a substituent.

Unsubstituted Alkenyl Group (Specific Example Group G4A):

vinyl group, allyl group, 1-butenyl group, 2-butenyl group, and3-butenyl group.

Substituted Alkenyl Group (Specific Example Group G4B):

1,3-butanedienyl group, 1-methylvinyl group, 1-methylallyl group,1,1-dimethylallyl group, 2-methylallyl group, and 1,2-dimethylallylgroup.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Alkynyl Group

Specific examples (specific example group G5) of the “substituted orunsubstituted alkynyl group” mentioned herein include unsubstitutedalkynyl groups (specific example group G5A) below. (Herein, anunsubstituted alkynyl group refers to an “unsubstituted alkynyl group”in a “substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group.” A simply termed“alkynyl roup” herein includes both of “unsubstituted alkynyl group” and“substituted alkynyl group.”)

The “substituted alkynyl group” refers to a group derived bysubstituting at least one hydrogen atom in an “unsubstituted alkynylgroup” with a substituent. Specific examples of the “substituted alkynylgroup” include a group derived by substituting at least one hydrogenatom of the “unsubstituted alkynyl group” (specific example group G5A)below with a substituent.

Unsubstituted Alkynyl Group (Specific Example Group G5A): ethynyl group

Substituted or Unsubstituted Cycloalkyl Group

Specific examples (specific example group G6) of the “substituted orunsubstituted cycloalkyl group” mentioned herein include unsubstitutedcycloalkyl groups (specific example group G6A) and substitutedcycloalkyl groups (specific example group G6B). (Herein, anunsubstituted cycloalkyl group refers to an “unsubstituted cycloalkylgroup” in a “substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group,” and asubstituted cycloalkyl group refers to a “substituted cycloalkyl group”in a “substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group.” A simply termed“cycloalkyl group” herein includes both of “unsubstituted cycloalkylgroup” and “substituted cycloalkyl group.”)

The “substituted cycloalkyl group” refers to a group derived bysubstituting at least one hydrogen atom of an “unsubstituted cycloalkylgroup” with a substituent. Specific examples of the “substitutedcycloalkyl group” include a group derived by substituting at least onehydrogen atom of the “unsubstituted cycloalkyl group” (specific examplegroup G6A) below with a substituent, and examples of the substitutedcycloalkyl group (specific example group G6B) below. It should be notedthat the examples of the “unsubstituted cycloalkyl group” and the“substituted cycloalkyl group” mentioned herein are merely exemplary,and the “substituted cycloalkyl group” mentioned herein includes a groupderived by substituting at least one hydrogen atom bonded to a carbonatom of a skeleton of the “substituted cycloalkyl group” in the specificexample group G6B with a substituent, and a group derived by furthersubstituting a hydrogen atom of a substituent of the “substitutedcycloalkyl group” in the specific example group G6B with a substituent.

Unsubstituted Cycloalkyl Group (Specific Example Group G6A):

cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexylgroup, 1-adamantyl group, 2-adamantyl group, 1-norbornyl group, and2-norbornyl group.

Substituted Cycloalkyl Group (Specific Example Group G6B):

4-methylcyclohexyl groupGroup represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃)

Specific examples (specific example group G7) of the group representedherein by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃) include: —Si(G1)(G1)(G1);—Si(G1)(G2)(G2); —Si(G1)(G1)(G2); —Si(G2)(G2)(G2); —Si(G3)(G3)(G3); and—Si(G6)(G6)(G6).

Herein: G1 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted aryl group” in thespecific example group G1;

-   -   G2 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group” in the specific example group G2;    -   G3 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group” in        the specific example group G3; and    -   G6 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group”        in the specific example group G6.

A plurality of G1 in —Si(G1)(G1)(G1) are mutually the same or different.

A plurality of G2 in —Si(G1)(G2)(G2) are mutually the same or different.

A plurality of G1 in —Si(G1)(G1)(G2) are mutually the same or different.

A plurality of G2 in —Si(G2)(G2)(G2) are mutually the same or different.

A plurality of G3 in —Si(G3)(G3)(G3) are mutually the same or different.

A plurality of G6 in —Si(G6)(G6)(G6) are mutually the same or different.

Group Represented by —O—(R₉₀₄)

Specific examples (specific example group G8) of a group represented by—O—(R₉₀₄) herein include —O(G1); —O(G2); —O(G3); and —O(G6).

Herein: G1 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted aryl group” in thespecific example group G1;

-   -   G2 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group” in the specific example group G2;    -   G3 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group” in        the specific example group G3; and    -   G6 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group”        in the specific example group G6.

Group Represented by —S—(R₉₀₅)

Specific examples (specific example group G9) of a group representedherein by —S—(R₉₀₅) include: —S(G1); —S(G2); —S(G3); and —S(G6).

Herein: G1 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted aryl group” in thespecific example group G1;

-   -   G2 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group” in the specific example group G2;    -   G3 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group” in        the specific example group G3; and    -   G6 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group”        in the specific example group G6.        Group Represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇)

Specific examples (specific example group G10) of a group representedherein by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇) include: —N(G1)(G1); —N(G2)(G2); —N(G1)(G2);—N(G3)(G3); and —N(G6)(G6).

Herein: G1 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted aryl group” in thespecific example group G1;

-   -   G2 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group” in the specific example group G2;    -   G3 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group” in        the specific example group G3; and    -   G6 represents a “substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group”        in the specific example group G6.

A plurality of G1 in —N(G1)(G1) are mutually the same or different.

A plurality of G2 in —N(G2)(G2) are mutually the same or different.

A plurality of G3 in —N(G3)(G3) are mutually the same or different.

A plurality of G6 in —N(G6)(G6)) are mutually the same or different.

Halogen Atom

Specific examples (specific example group G11) of “halogen atom”mentioned herein include a fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom,and iodine atom.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Fluoroalkyl Group

The “substituted or unsubstituted fluoroalkyl group” mentioned hereinrefers to a group derived by substituting at least one hydrogen atombonded to at least one of carbon atoms forming an alkyl group in the“substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group” with a fluorine atom, andalso includes a group (perfluoro group) derived by substituting all ofhydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atoms forming the alkyl group in the“substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group” with fluorine atoms. An“unsubstituted fluoroalkyl group” has, unless otherwise specifiedherein, 1 to 50, preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 18 carbonatoms. The “substituted fluoroalkyl group” refers to a group derived bysubstituting at least one hydrogen atom in a “fluoroalkyl group” with asubstituent. It should be noted that the examples of the “substitutedfluoroalkyl group” mentioned herein includes a group derived by furthersubstituting at least one hydrogen atom bonded to a carbon atom of analkyl chain of a “substituted fluoroalkyl group” with a substituent, anda group derived by further substituting at least one hydrogen atom of asubstituent of the “substituted fluoroalkyl group” with a substituent.Specific examples of the “substituted fluoroalkyl group” include a groupderived by substituting at least one hydrogen atom of the “alkyl group”(specific example group G3) with a fluorine atom.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Haloalkyl Group

The “substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group” mentioned hereinrefers to a group derived by substituting at least one hydrogen atombonded to carbon atoms forming the alkyl group in the “substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group” with a halogen atom, and also includes agroup derived by substituting all hydrogen atoms bonded to carbon atomsforming the alkyl group in the “substituted or unsubstituted alkylgroup” with halogen atoms. An “unsubstituted haloalkyl group” has,unless otherwise specified herein, 1 to 50, preferably 1 to 30, morepreferably 1 to 18 carbon atoms. The “substituted haloalkyl group”refers to a group derived by substituting at least one hydrogen atom ina “haloalkyl group” with a substituent. It should be noted that theexamples of the “substituted haloalkyl group” mentioned herein includesa group derived by further substituting at least one hydrogen atombonded to a carbon atom of an alkyl chain of a “substituted haloalkylgroup” with a substituent, and a group derived by further substitutingat least one hydrogen atom of a substituent of the “substitutedhaloalkyl group” with a substituent. Specific examples of the“substituted haloalkyl group” include a group derived by substituting atleast one hydrogen atom of the “alkyl group” (specific example group G3)with a halogen atom. The haloalkyl group is sometimes referred to as ahalogenated alkyl group.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Alkoxy Group

Specific examples of the “substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group”mentioned herein include a group represented by —O(G3), G3 being the“substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group” in the specific example groupG3. An “unsubstituted alkoxy group” has, unless otherwise specifiedherein, 1 to 50, preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 18 carbonatoms.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Alkylthio Group

Specific examples of the “substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group”mentioned herein include a group represented by —S(G3), G3 being the“substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group” in the specific example groupG3. An “unsubstituted alkylthio group” has, unless otherwise specifiedherein, 1 to 50, preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 18 carbonatoms.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Aryloxy Group

Specific examples of the “substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group”mentioned herein include a group represented by —O(G1), G1 being the“substituted or unsubstituted aryl group” in the specific example groupG1. An “unsubstituted aryloxy group” has, unless otherwise specifiedherein, 6 to 50, preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 18 ring carbonatoms.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Arylthio Group

Specific examples of the “substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group”mentioned herein include a group represented by —S(G1), G1 being the“substituted or unsubstituted aryl group” in the specific example groupG1. An “unsubstituted arylthio group” has, unless otherwise specifiedherein, 6 to 50, preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 18 ring carbonatoms.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Trialkylsilyl Group

Specific examples of the “trialkylsilyl group” mentioned herein includea group represented by —Si(G3)(G3)(G3), G3 being the “substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group” in the specific example group G3. Theplurality of G3 in —Si(G3)(G3)(G3) are mutually the same or different.Each of the alkyl groups in the “trialkylsilyl group” has, unlessotherwise specified herein, 1 to 50, preferably 1 to 20, more preferably1 to 6 carbon atoms.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Aralkyl Group

Specific examples of the “substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group”mentioned herein include a group represented by (G3)-(G1), G3 being the“substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group” in the specific example groupG3, G1 being the “substituted or unsubstituted aryl group” in thespecific example group G1. Accordingly, the “aralkyl group” is a groupderived by substituting a hydrogen atom of the “alkyl group” with asubstituent in a form of the “aryl group,” which is an example of the“substituted alkyl group.” An “unsubstituted aralkyl group,” which is an“unsubstituted alkyl group” substituted by an “unsubstituted arylgroup,” has, unless otherwise specified herein, 7 to 50 carbon atoms,preferably 7 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 7 to 18 carbon atoms.

Specific examples of the “substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group”include a benzyl group, 1-phenylethyl group, 2-phenylethyl group,1-phenylisopropyl group, 2-phenylisopropyl group, phenyl-t-butyl group,α-naphthylmethyl group, 1-α-naphthylethyl group, 2-α-naphthylethylgroup, 1-α-naphthylisopropyl group, 2-α-naphthylisopropyl group,β-naphthylmethyl group, 1-β-naphthylethyl group, 2-β-naphthylethylgroup, 1-β-naphthylisopropyl group, and 2-β-naphthylisopropyl group.

Preferable examples of the substituted or unsubstituted aryl groupmentioned herein include, unless otherwise specified herein, a phenylgroup, p-biphenyl group, m-biphenyl group, o-biphenyl group,p-terphenyl-4-yl group, p-terphenyl-3-yl group, p-terphenyl-2-yl group,m-terphenyl-4-yl group, m-terphenyl-3-yl group, m-terphenyl-2-yl group,o-terphenyl-4-yl group, o-terphenyl-3-yl group, o-terphenyl-2-yl group,1-naphthyl group, 2-naphthyl group, anthryl group, phenanthryl group,pyrenyl group, chrysenyl group, triphenylenyl group, fluorenyl group,9,9′-spirobifluorenyl group, 9,9-dimethylfluorenyl group, and9,9-diphenylfluorenyl group.

Preferable examples of the substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclicgroup mentioned herein include, unless otherwise specified herein, apyridyl group, pyrimidinyl group, triazinyl group, quinolyl group,isoquinolyl group, quinazolinyl group, benzimidazolyl group,phenanthrolinyl group, carbazolyl group (1-carbazolyl group,2-carbazolyl group, 3-carbazolyl group, 4-carbazolyl group, or9-carbazolyl group), benzocarbazolyl group, azacarbazolyl group,diazacarbazolyl group, dibenzofuranyl group, naphthobenzofuranyl group,azadibenzofuranyl group, diazadibenzofuranyl group, dibenzothiophenylgroup, naphthobenzothiophenyl group, azadibenzothiophenyl group,diazadibenzothiophenyl group, (9-phenyl)carbazolyl group((9-phenyl)carbazole-1-yl group, (9-phenyl)carbazole-2-yl group,(9-phenyl)carbazole-3-yl group, or (9-phenyl)carbazole-4-yl group),(9-biphenylyl)carbazolyl group, (9-phenyl)phenylcarbazolyl group,diphenylcarbazole-9-yl group, phenylcarbazole-9-yl group,phenyltriazinyl group, biphenylyltriazinyl group, diphenyltriazinylgroup, phenyldibenzofuranyl group, and phenyldibenzothiophenyl group.

The carbazolyl group mentioned herein is, unless otherwise specifiedherein, specifically a group represented by one of formulae below.

The (9-phenyl)carbazolyl group mentioned herein is, unless otherwisespecified herein, specifically a group represented by one of formulaebelow.

In the formulae (TEMP-Cz1) to (TEMP-Cz9), * represents a bondingposition.

The dibenzofuranyl group and dibenzothiophenyl group mentioned hereinare, unless otherwise specified herein, each specifically represented byone of formulae below.

In the formulae (TEMP-34) to (TEMP-41), * represents a bonding position.

Preferable examples of the substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groupmentioned herein include, unless otherwise specified herein, a methylgroup, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group,isobutyl group, and t-butyl group.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Arylene Group

The “substituted or unsubstituted arylene group” mentioned herein is,unless otherwise specified herein, a divalent group derived by removingone hydrogen atom on an aryl ring of the “substituted or unsubstitutedaryl group.” Specific examples of the “substituted or unsubstitutedarylene group” (specific example group G12) include a divalent groupderived by removing one hydrogen atom on an aryl ring of the“substituted or unsubstituted aryl group” in the specific example groupG1.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Divalent Heterocyclic Group

The “substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group” mentionedherein is, unless otherwise specified herein, a divalent group derivedby removing one hydrogen atom on a heterocyclic ring of the “substitutedor unsubstituted heterocyclic group.” Specific examples of the“substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group” (specific examplegroup G13) include a divalent group derived by removing one hydrogenatom on a heterocyclic ring of the “substituted or unsubstitutedheterocyclic group” in the specific example group G2.

Substituted or Unsubstituted Alkylene Group

The “substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group” mentioned herein is,unless otherwise specified herein, a divalent group derived by removingone hydrogen atom on an alkyl ring of the “substituted or unsubstitutedalkyl group.” Specific examples of the “substituted or unsubstitutedalkylene group” (specific example group G14) include a divalent groupderived by removing one hydrogen atom on an alkyl ring of the“substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group” in the specific example groupG3.

The substituted or unsubstituted arylene group mentioned herein is,unless otherwise specified herein, preferably any one of groupsrepresented by formulae (TEMP-42) to (TEMP-68) below.

In the formulae (TEMP-42) to (TEMP-52), Q₁ to Q₁₀ each independently area hydrogen atom or a substituent.

In the formulae (TEMP-42) to (TEMP-52), * represents a bonding position.

In the formulae (TEMP-53) to (TEMP-62), Q₁ to Q₁₀ each independently area hydrogen atom or a substituent.

In the formulae, Q₉ and Q₁₀ may be mutually bonded through a single bondto form a ring.

In the formulae (TEMP-53) to (TEMP-62), * represents a bonding position.

In the formulae (TEMP-63) to (TEMP-68), Q₁ to Q₈ each independently area hydrogen atom or a substituent.

In the formulae (TEMP-63) to (TEMP-68), * represents a bonding position.

The substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group mentionedherein is, unless otherwise specified herein, preferably a grouprepresented by any one of formulae (TEMP-69) to (TEMP-102) below.

In the formulae (TEMP-69) to (TEMP-82), Q₁ to Q₉ each independently area hydrogen atom or a substituent.

In the formulae (TEMP-83) to (TEMP-102), Q₁ to Q₈ each independently area hydrogen atom or a substituent.

The substituent mentioned herein has been described above.

Instance of “Bonded to Form Ring”

Instances where “at least one combination of adjacent two or more (of .. . ) are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstitutedmonocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstitutedfused ring, or not mutually bonded” mentioned herein refer to instanceswhere “at least one combination of adjacent two or more (of . . . ) aremutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring,”at least one combination of adjacent two or more (of . . . ) aremutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring,” and“at least one combination of adjacent two or more (of . . . ) are notmutually bonded.”

Instances where “at least one combination of adjacent two or more (of .. . ) are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstitutedmonocyclic ring” and “at least one combination of adjacent two or more(of . . . ) are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstitutedfused ring” mentioned herein (these instances will be sometimescollectively referred to as an instance of “bonded to form a ring”hereinafter) will be described below. An anthracene compound having abasic skeleton in a form of an anthracene ring and represented by aformula (TEMP-103) below will be used as an example for the description.

For instance, when “at least one combination of adjacent two or more of”R₉₂₁ to R₉₃₀ “are mutually bonded to form a ring,” the pair of adjacentones of R₉₂₁ to R₉₃₀ (i.e. the combination at issue) is a pair of R₉₂₁and a pair of R₉₂₂, R₉₂₂ and R₉₂₃, a pair of R₉₂₃ and R₉₂₄, a pair ofR₉₂₄ and R₉₃₀, a pair of R₉₃₀ and R₉₂₅, a pair of R₉₂₅ and R₉₂₆, a pairof R₉₂₆ and R₉₂₇, a pair of R₉₂₇ and R₉₂₈, a pair of R₉₂₈ and R₉₂₉, or apair of R₉₂₉ and R₉₂₁.

The term “at least one combination” means that two or more of the abovecombinations of adjacent two or more of R₉₂₁ to R₉₃₀ may simultaneouslyform rings. For instance, when R₉₂₁ and R₉₂₂ are mutually bonded to forma ring Q_(A) and R₉₂₅ and R₉₂₆ are simultaneously mutually bonded toform a ring Q_(B), the anthracene compound represented by the formula(TEMP-103) is represented by a formula (TEMP-104) below.

The instance where the “combination of adjacent two or more” form a ringmeans not only an instance where the “two” adjacent components arebonded but also an instance where adjacent “three or more” are bonded.For instance, R₉₂₁ and R₉₂₂ are mutually bonded to form a ring Q_(A) andR₉₂₂, R₉₂₃ are mutually bonded to form a ring Q_(C), and mutuallyadjacent three components (R₉₂₁, R₉₂₂ and R₉₂₃) are mutually bonded toform a ring fused to the anthracene basic skeleton. In this case, theanthracene compound represented by the formula (TEMP-103) is representedby a formula (TEMP-105) below. In the formula (TEMP-105) below, the ringQ_(A) and the ring Q_(C) share R₉₂₂.

The formed “monocyclic ring” or “fused ring” may be, in terms of theformed ring in itself, a saturated ring or an unsaturated ring. When the“combination of adjacent two” form a “monocyclic ring” or a “fusedring,” the “monocyclic ring” or “fused ring” may be a saturated ring oran unsaturated ring. For instance, the ring Q_(A) and the ring OB formedin the formula (TEMP-104) are each independently a “monocyclic ring” ora “fused ring.” Further, the ring Q_(A) and the ring Q_(C) formed in theformula (TEMP-105) are each a “fused ring.” The ring Q_(A) and the ringQ_(C) in the formula (TEMP-105) are fused to form a fused ring. When thering Q_(A) in the formula (TMEP-104) is a benzene ring, the ring Q_(A)is a monocyclic ring. When the ring Q_(A) in the formula (TMEP-104) is anaphthalene ring, the ring Q_(A) is a fused ring.

The “unsaturated ring” represents an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or anaromatic heterocycle. The “saturated ring” represents an aliphatichydrocarbon ring or a non-aromatic heterocycle.

Specific examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring include a ring formedby terminating a bond of a group in the specific example of the specificexample group G1 with a hydrogen atom.

Specific examples of the aromatic heterocyclic ring include a ringformed by terminating a bond of an aromatic heterocyclic group in thespecific example of the specific example group G2 with a hydrogen atom.

Specific examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring include a ringformed by terminating a bond of a group in the specific example of thespecific example group G6 with a hydrogen atom.

The phrase “to form a ring” herein means that a ring is formed only by aplurality of atoms of a basic skeleton, or by a combination of aplurality of atoms of the basic skeleton and one or more optional atoms.For instance, the ring Q_(A) formed by mutually bonding R₉₂₁ and R₉₂₂shown in the formula (TEMP-104) is a ring formed by a carbon atom of theanthracene skeleton bonded with R₉₂₁, a carbon atom of the anthraceneskeleton bonded with R₉₂₂, and one or more optional atoms. Specifically,when the ring Q_(A) is a monocyclic unsaturated ring formed by R₉₂₁ andR₉₂₂, the ring formed by a carbon atom of the anthracene skeleton bondedwith R₉₂₁, a carbon atom of the anthracene skeleton bonded with R₉₂₂,and four carbon atoms is a benzene ring.

The “optional atom” is, unless otherwise specified herein, preferably atleast one atom selected from the group consisting of a carbon atom,nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, and sulfur atom. A bond of the optional atom(e.g. a carbon atom and a nitrogen atom) not forming a ring may beterminated by a hydrogen atom or the like or may be substituted by an“optional substituent” described later. When the ring includes anoptional element other than carbon atom, the resultant ring is aheterocycle.

The number of “one or more optional atoms” forming the monocyclic ringor fused ring is, unless otherwise specified herein, preferably in arange from 2 to 15, more preferably in a range from 3 to 12, furtherpreferably in a range from 3 to 5.

Unless otherwise specified herein, the ring, which may be a “monocyclicring” or “fused ring,” is preferably a “monocyclic ring.”

Unless otherwise specified herein, the ring, which may be a “saturatedring” or “unsaturated ring,” is preferably an “unsaturated ring.”

Unless otherwise specified herein, the “monocyclic ring” is preferably abenzene ring.

Unless otherwise specified herein, the “unsaturated ring” is preferablya benzene ring.

When “at least one combination of adjacent two or more” (of . . . ) are“mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring”or “mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring,”unless otherwise specified herein, at least one combination of adjacenttwo or more of components are preferably mutually bonded to form asubstituted or unsubstituted “unsaturated ring” formed of a plurality ofatoms of the basic skeleton, and 1 to 15 atoms of at least one elementselected from the group consisting of carbon, nitrogen, oxygen andsulfur.

When the “monocyclic ring” or the “fused ring” has a substituent, thesubstituent is the substituent described in later-described “optionalsubstituent.” When the “monocyclic ring” or the “fused ring” has asubstituent, specific examples of the substituent are the substituentsdescribed in the above under the subtitle “Substituents MentionedHerein.”

When the “saturated ring” or the “unsaturated ring” has a substituent,the substituent is, for instance, the substituent described inlater-described “optional substituent.” When the “monocyclic ring” orthe “fused ring” has a substituent, specific examples of the substituentare the substituents described in the above under the subtitle“Substituents Mentioned Herein.”

The above is the description for the instances where “at least onecombination of adjacent two or more (of . . . ) are mutually bonded toform a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring” and “at least onecombination of adjacent two or more (of . . . ) are mutually bonded toform a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring” mentioned herein(sometimes referred to as an instance “bonded to form a ring”.

Substituent for Substituted or Unsubstituted Group In an exemplaryembodiment herein, a substituent for the substituted or unsubstitutedgroup (sometimes referred to as an “optional substituent” hereinafter)is, for instance, a group selected from the group consisting of anunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, an unsubstitutedalkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, an unsubstituted alkynylgroup having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, an unsubstituted cycloalkyl grouphaving 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), —O—(R₉₀₄),—S—(R₉₀₅), —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group,an unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, and anunsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;

-   -   herein, R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₇ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3        to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   when two or more R₉₀₁ are present, the two or more R₉₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more R₉₀₂ are present, the two or more R₉₀₂ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more R₉₀₃ are present, the two or more R₉₀₃ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more R₉₀₄ are present, the two or more R₉₀₄ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more R₉₀₅ are present, the two or more R₉₀₅ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more R₉₀₆ are present, the two or more R₉₀₆ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   when two or more R₉₀₇ are present, the two or more R₉₀₇ are        mutually the same or different.

In an exemplary embodiment, a substituent for the substituted orunsubstituted group is selected from the group consisting of an alkylgroup having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 50 ringcarbon atoms, and a heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, a substituent for the substituted orunsubstituted group is selected from the group consisting of an alkylgroup having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 18 ringcarbon atoms, and a heterocyclic group having 5 to 18 ring atoms.

Specific examples of the above optional substituent are the same as thespecific examples of the substituent described in the above under thesubtitle “Substituent Mentioned Herein.”

Unless otherwise specified herein, adjacent ones of the optionalsubstituents may form a “saturated ring” or an “unsaturated ring,”preferably a substituted or unsubstituted saturated five-membered ring,a substituted or unsubstituted saturated six-membered ring, asubstituted or unsubstituted saturated five-membered ring, or asubstituted or unsubstituted unsaturated six-membered ring, morepreferably a benzene ring.

Unless otherwise specified herein, the optional substituent may furtherinclude a substituent. Examples of the substituent for the optionalsubstituent are the same as the examples of the optional substituent.

Herein, numerical ranges represented by “AA to BB” represents a rangewhose lower limit is the value (AA) recited before “to” and whose upperlimit is the value (BB) recited after “to.”

First Exemplary Embodiment Organic Electroluminescence Device

In the exemplary embodiment, an “organic EL device according to theexemplary embodiment” at least includes an “organic EL device accordingto a first aspect” and an “organic EL device according to a secondaspect” below, and may further include an organic EL device according toany other aspect.

An organic EL device according to the first aspect of the exemplaryembodiment includes an anode, a cathode, a first emitting layer disposedbetween the anode and the cathode, a second emitting layer disposedbetween the first emitting layer and the cathode, and an electronblocking layer disposed between the first emitting layer and the anode.In the organic EL device according to the first aspect, the firstemitting layer and the second emitting layer are in direct contact witheach other. The first emitting layer and the electron blocking layer arein direct contact with each other. In the organic EL device according tothe first aspect, the first emitting layer includes a first hostmaterial in a form of the first compound represented by the formula (1),and the first compound has at least one group represented by the formula(11). In the organic EL device according to the first aspect, the secondemitting layer includes a second host material in a form of a secondcompound represented by the formula (2). In the organic EL deviceaccording to the first aspect, the electron blocking layer contains athird compound, and an ionization potential Ip(HT) of the third compoundsatisfies a numerical formula (M1) below.

Ip(HT)≥5.67 eV  (M1)

In the organic EL device according to the first aspect, the ionizationpotential of the third compound is preferably 5.70 eV or more (i.e.,Ip(HT)≥5.70 eV), more preferably greater than 5.7 eV (i.e., Ip(HT)≥5.7eV).

In the organic EL device according to the first aspect, the ionizationpotential of the third compound is further preferably 5.74 eV or more(i.e., Ip(HT)≥5.74 eV).

A arithmetric symbol “≥” in the numerical formula (M1) means that theionization potential of the third compound is 5.67 eV or more. The sameapplies to other numerical formulae.

Herein, the ionization potential is measured using a photoelectronspectroscope under atmosphere. Specifically, the ionization potential ismeasurable according to the method described in Examples.

An organic EL device according to the second aspect of the exemplaryembodiment includes an anode, a cathode, a first emitting layer disposedbetween the anode and the cathode, a second emitting layer disposedbetween the first emitting layer and the cathode, and an electronblocking layer disposed between the first emitting layer and the anode.In the organic EL device according to the second aspect, the firstemitting layer and the second emitting layer are in direct contact witheach other, and the first emitting layer and the electron blocking layerare in direct contact with each other. In the organic EL deviceaccording to the second aspect, the first emitting layer includes afirst host material in a form of a first compound represented by theformula (1), and the first compound has at least one group representedby the formula (11). In the organic EL device according to the secondaspect, the second emitting layer includes a second host material in aform of a second compound represented by the formula (2). In the organicEL device according to the second aspect, the electron blocking layercontains a third compound, and the third compound is at least onecompound selected from the group consisting of a compound represented bya formula (31) below and a compound represented by a formula (32) below.In the organic EL device according to the second aspect, when the thirdcompound is represented by the formula (31) and contains two substitutedor unsubstituted amino groups, nitrogen atoms of the two substituted orunsubstituted amino groups are linked to each other by a substituted orunsubstituted arylene group having 13 to 50 ring carbon atoms or asubstituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 13 to 50ring atoms. In the organic EL device according to the second aspect,when the compound represented by the formula (31) as the third compoundincludes a 4-dibenzofuran structure in a molecule, the number of the4-dibenzofuran structures is one.

In the organic EL device according to the second aspect, an ionizationpotential Ip(HT) of the third compound preferably satisfies a numericalformula (M1) below.

Ip(HT)≥5.67 eV  (M1)

In the organic EL device according to the second aspect, the ionizationpotential of the third compound is preferably 5.70 eV or more (i.e.,Ip(HT) 5.70 eV), more preferably greater than 5.7 eV (i.e., Ip(HT)>5.7eV).

In the organic EL device according to the second aspect, the ionizationpotential of the third compound is further preferably 5.74 eV or more(i.e., Ip(HT) 5.74 eV).

The organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment may includeone or more organic layers in addition to the first emitting layer, thesecond emitting layer, and the electron blocking layer. The organiclayer is, for instance, at least one layer selected from the groupconsisting of a hole injecting layer, a hole transporting layer, anemitting layer, an electron injecting layer, an electron transportinglayer, and a hole blocking layer.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, theorganic layer, which may consist solely of the first emitting layer, thesecond emitting layer and the electron blocking layer, may furtherinclude, for instance, at least one layer selected from the groupconsisting of the hole injecting layer, the hole transporting layer, theelectron injecting layer, the electron transporting layer, and the holeblocking layer.

Electron Transporting Layer

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, theelectron transporting layer is preferably provided between the secondemitting layer and the cathode.

Hole Transporting Layer In the organic EL device according to theexemplary embodiment, the hole transporting layer is preferably providedbetween the anode and the electron blocking layer.

Schematic Structure of Organic EL Device

The FIGURE schematically shows an exemplary structure of the organic ELdevice of the exemplary embodiment.

The organic EL device 1 includes a light-transmissive substrate 2, ananode 3, a cathode 4, and an organic layer 10 provided between the anode3 and the cathode 4. The organic layer 10 includes a hole injectinglayer 6, a hole transporting layer 7, an electron blocking layer 70, afirst emitting layer 51, a second emitting layer 52, an electrontransporting layer 8, and an electron injecting layer 9, these layersbeing layered in this order from the anode 3.

First Emitting Layer

The first emitting layer and the second emitting layer are in directcontact with each other, and the first emitting layer and the electronblocking layer are also in direct contact with each other. The firstemitting layer includes a first host material in a form of the firstcompound represented by the formula (1). The first compound has at leastone group represented by the formula (11).

Herein, the “host material” refers to, for instance, a material thataccounts for “50 mass % or more of the layer.” Accordingly, forinstance, the first emitting layer contains 50 mass % or more of thefirst compound represented by the formula (1) below with respect to atotal mass of the first emitting layer. The second emitting layercontains 50 mass % or more of the second compound represented by theformula (2) below with respect to a total mass of the second emittinglayer. Moreover, for instance, the “host material” may account for 60mass % or more of the layer, 70 mass % or more of the layer, 80 mass %or more of the layer, 90 mass % or more of the layer, or 95 mass % ormore of the layer.

The first emitting layer preferably contains a compound that emits lighthaving a maximum peak wavelength in a range from 430 nm to 480 nm.

It is preferable that the first emitting layer further contains a fifthcompound that emits fluorescence.

The fifth compound is preferably a compound that emits light having amaximum peak wavelength in a range from 430 nm to 480 nm.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, when thefirst emitting layer contains the first compound and the fifth compound,the first compound is preferably a host material (occasionally alsoreferred to as a matrix material) and the fifth compound is preferably adopant material (occasionally also referred to as a guest material,emitter or a luminescent material).

It is preferable that the first emitting layer does not contain aphosphorescent material as a dopant material.

It is preferable that the first emitting layer does not contain aheavy-metal complex and a phosphorescent rare-earth metal complex.Examples of the heavy metal complex herein include iridium complex,osmium complex, and platinum complex.

It is also preferable that the first emitting layer does not contain ametal complex.

First Compound

The first compound is a compound represented by the formula (1). Thefirst compound has at least one group represented by the formula (11).

In the formula (1):

-   -   R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon        atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by        —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group        having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the formula        (11);    -   at least one of R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ is the group represented by the        formula (11);    -   when a plurality of groups represented by the formula (11) are        present, the plurality of groups represented by the formula (11)        are mutually the same or different;    -   L₁₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted arylene        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring        atoms;    -   Ar₁₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mx is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;    -   when two or more L₁₀₁ are present, the two or more L₁₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more Ar₁₀₁ are present, the two or more Ar₁₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   * in the formula (11) represents a bonding position to a pyrene        ring represented by the formula (1).    -   R₉₀₁, R₉₀₂, R₉₀₃, R₉₀₄, R₉₀₅, R₉₀₆, R₉₀₇, R₈₀₁, and R₈₀₂ in the        first compound represented by the formula (1) are each        independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₂ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₃ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₄ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₄ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₅ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₅ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₆ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₆ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₇ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₇ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and when a plurality of R₈₀₂ are        present, the plurality of R₈₀₂ are mutually the same or        different.

The group represented by the formula (11) is preferably a grouprepresented by a formula (111) below.

In the formula (111):

-   -   X₁ is CR₁₂₃R₁₂₄, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NR₁₂₅;    -   L₁₁₁ and L₁₁₂ are each independently a single bond, a        substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   ma is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4, mb is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4, ma+mb is 0, 1,        2, 3, or 4;    -   Ar₁₀₁ represents the same as Ar₁₀₁ in the formula (11);    -   R₁₂₁, R₁₂₂, R₁₂₃, R₁₂₄, and R₁₂₅ are each independently a        hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having        1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl        group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3        to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group        represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl        group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, a group represented by        —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a        cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mc is 3; three R₁₂₁ are mutually the same or different; and    -   md is 3; and three R₁₂₂ are mutually the same or different.

Among positions *1 to *8 of carbon atoms in the cyclic structurerepresented by a formula (111a) below in the group represented by theformula (111), L₁₁₁ is bonded to one of positions *1 to *4, R₁₂₁ isbonded to three positions of the rest of *1 to *4, L₁₁₂ is bonded to oneof positions *5 to *8, and R₁₂₂ is bonded to three positions of the restof *5 to *8.

For instance, in the group represented by the formula (111), when L₁₁₁and L₁₁₂ are bonded to *2 and *7 positions, respectively, of the carbonatom of the cyclic structure represented by the formula (111a), thegroup represented by the formula (111) is represented by a formula (111b) below.

In the formula (111b): X₁, L₁₁₁, L₁₁₂, ma, mb, Ar₁₀₁, R₁₂₁, R₁₂₂, R₁₂₃,R₁₂₄, and R₁₂₅ each independently represent the same as X₁, L₁₁₁, L₁₁₂,ma, mb, Ar₁₀₁, R₁₂₁, R₁₂₂, R₁₂₃, R₁₂₄, and R₁₂₅ in the formula (111);

-   -   a plurality of R₁₂₁ are mutually the same or different; and    -   a plurality of R₁₂₂ are mutually the same or different.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thegroup represented by the formula (111) is preferably a group representedby the formula (111b).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, ma ispreferably 0, 1, or 2; and mb is preferably 0, 1, or 2.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, ma ispreferably 0 or 1; and mb is preferably 0 or 1.

In the group represented by the formula (111), when ma is 0 and mb is 1,the group represented by the formula (111) is represented by a formula(111c) below.

In the formula (111c), X₁, L₁₁₂, mc, md, Ar₁₀₁, R₁₂₁, and R₁₂₂ eachindependently represent the same as X₁, L₁₁₂, mc, md, Ar₁₀₁, R₁₂₁, andR₁₂₂ in the formula (111).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, Ar₁₀₁ ispreferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ringcarbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, Ar₁₀₁ ispreferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group, a substituted orunsubstituted naphthyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted biphenylgroup, a substituted or unsubstituted terphenyl group, a substituted orunsubstituted pyrenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted phenanthrylgroup, or a substituted or unsubstituted fluorenyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, Ar₁₀₁ isalso preferably a group represented by a formula (12), a formula (13),or a formula (14) below.

In the formulae (12), (13), and (14):

-   -   R₁₁₁ to R₁₂₀ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a substituted or        unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, a group        represented by —C(═O)R₁₂₄, a group represented by —COOR₁₂₅, a        halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms; and    -   * in the formulae (12), (13), and (14) represents a bonding        position to L₁₀₁ in the formula (11), a bonding position to L₁₁₂        in the formula (111), or a bonding position to L₁₁₂ in the        formula (111 b).

It is also preferable that R₁₂₄ and R₁₂₅ in the formulae (12), (13), and(14) each independently represent the same as the above-described R₈₀₁and R₈₀₂.

The first compound is preferably represented by a formula (101) below.

In the formula (101): R₁₀₁ to R₁₂₀ are each independently a hydrogenatom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl grouphaving 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by—Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a grouprepresented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl grouphaving 7 to 50 carbon atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a grouprepresented by —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to50 ring atoms;

-   -   one of R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ represents a bonding position to L₁₀₁, and        one of R₁₁₁ to R₁₂₀ represents a bonding position to L₁₀₁;    -   L₁₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted arylene        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring        atoms;    -   mx is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5; and    -   when two or more L₁₀₁ are present, the two or more L₁₀₁ are        mutually the same or different.

In the formula (101), when R₁₀₃ is a bonding position to L₁₀₁ and R₁₂₀is a bonding position to L₁₀₁, the compound represented by the formula(101) is represented by a formula (101A) below.

In the formula (101A), R₁₀₁, R₁₀₂, R₁₀₄ to R₁₁₉, L₁₀₁ and mxrespectively represent the same as R₁₀₁, R₁₀₂, R₁₀₄ to R₁₁₉, L₁₀₁ and mxin the formula (101).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, L₁₀₁ ispreferably a single bond, or a substituted or unsubstituted arylenegroup having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thefirst compound is preferably represented by a formula (102) below.

In the formula (102): R₁₀₁ to R₁₂₀ each independently represent the sameas R₁₀₁ to R₁₂₀ of the formula (101);

-   -   one of R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ represents a bonding position to L₁₁₁, and        one of R₁₁₁ to R₁₂₀ represents a bonding position to L₁₁₂;    -   X₁ is CR₁₂₃R₁₂₄, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NR₁₂₅;    -   L₁₁₁ and L₁₁₂ are each independently a single bond, a        substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   ma is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4, mb is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4, ma+mb is 0, 1,        2, 3, or 4;    -   R₁₂₁, R₁₂₂, R₁₂₃, R₁₂₄, and R₁₂₅ are each independently a        hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having        1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl        group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3        to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group        represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl        group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, a group represented by        —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a        cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mc is 3;    -   three R₁₂₁ are mutually the same or different;    -   md is 3; and    -   three R₁₂₂ are mutually the same or different.

In the compound represented by the formula (102), it is preferable thatma is 0, 1, or 2; and mb is 0, 1, or 2.

In the compound represented by the formula (102), it is preferable thatma is 0 or 1; and mb is 0 or 1.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, two ormore of R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ are preferably groups represented by the formula(11).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it ispreferable that two or more of R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ are groups represented bythe formula (11) and Ar₁₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl grouphaving 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it ispreferable that Ar₁₀₁ is not a substituted or unsubstituted pyrenylgroup;

-   -   L₁₀₁ is not a substituted or unsubstituted pyrenylene group; and    -   the substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms as R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ not being the group represented by        the formula (11) is not a substituted or unsubstituted pyrenyl        group.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it ispreferable that R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ that are not the group represented by theformula (11) are each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to50 ring atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it ispreferable that R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ that are not the group represented by theformula (11) are each independently a hydrogen atom, or a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, or a substitutedor unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, R₁₀₁ toR₁₁₀ not being the group represented by the formula (11) are eachpreferably a hydrogen atom.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, X₁ ispreferably CR₁₂₃R₁₂₄. For example, when X₁ is CR₁₂₃R₁₂₄, the grouprepresented by the formula (111) is represented by a formula (111d)below.

In the formula (111 d), L₁₁₁, L₁₁₂, ma, mb, ma+mb, Ar₁₀₁, R₁₂₁, R₁₂₂,R₁₂₃, R₁₂₄, R₁₂₅, mc and md each represent the same as L₁₁₁, L₁₁₂, ma,mb, ma+mb, Ar₁₀₁, R₁₂₁, R₁₂₂, R₁₂₃, R₁₂₄, R₁₂₅, mc and md defined in theformula (111).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it ispreferable that R₁₂₃ and R₁₂₄ are not mutually bonded.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, at leastone of L₁₁₁ and L₁₁₂ is preferably a substituted or unsubstitutedarylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted orunsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In the first compound, the groups specified to be “substituted orunsubstituted” are each preferably an “unsubstituted” group.

Method of Manufacturing First Compound

The first compound can be manufactured by a known method. The firstcompound can also be manufactured based on a known method through aknown alternative reaction using a known material(s) tailored for thetarget compound.

Specific Examples of First Compound

Specific examples of the first compound include, for example, thefollowing compounds. It should however be noted that the invention isnot limited by the specific examples of the first compound.

Second Emitting Layer

The second emitting layer and the first emitting layer are in directcontact with each other. The second emitting layer includes a secondhost material in a form of the second compound represented by theformula (2).

The second emitting layer preferably contains a compound that emitslight having a maximum peak wavelength in a range from 430 nm to 480 nm.

It is preferable that the second emitting layer further contains afourth compound that emits fluorescence.

The fourth compound is preferably a compound that emits light having amaximum peak wavelength in a range from 430 nm to 480 nm.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, when thesecond emitting layer contains the second compound and the fourthcompound, the second compound is preferably a host material(occasionally also referred to as a matrix material) and the fourthcompound is preferably a dopant material (occasionally also referred toas a guest material, emitter or a luminescent material).

It is preferable that the second emitting layer does not contain aphosphorescent material as a dopant material.

It is preferable that the second emitting layer does not contain aheavy-metal complex and a phosphorescent rare-earth metal complex.Examples of the heavy metal complex herein include iridium complex,osmium complex, and platinum complex.

It is also preferable that the second emitting layer does not contain ametal complex.

Second Compound

The second compound represented by the formula (2) according to theexemplary embodiment will be described below.

In the formula (2): R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ are each independently a hydrogen atom,a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃),a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), agroup represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a substituted or unsubstitutedaralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, a group represented by—C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyanogroup, a nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclicgroup having 5 to 50 ring atoms,

-   -   L₂₀₁ and L₂₀₂ are each independently a single bond, a        substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; and    -   Ar₂₀₁ and Ar₂₀₂ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

In the second compound according to the exemplary embodiment, R₉₀₁,R₉₀₂, R₉₀₃, R₉₀₄, R₉₀₅, R₉₀₆, R₉₀₇, R₈₀₁, and R₈₀₂ are eachindependently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylgroup having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstitutedcycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ringatoms; when a plurality of R₉₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₁ aremutually the same or different;

-   -   when a plurality of R₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₂ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₃ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₄ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₄ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₅ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₅ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₆ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₆ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₇ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₇ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₂ are        mutually the same or different.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, R₂₀₁ toR₂₀₈ are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substitutedor unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, asubstituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ringcarbon atoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a grouprepresented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a grouprepresented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkylgroup having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, agroup represented by —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or a nitrogroup;

-   -   L₂₀₁ and L₂₀₂ are preferably each independently a single bond, a        substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; and    -   Ar₂₀₁ and Ar₂₀₂ are preferably each independently a substituted        or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or        a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, L₂₀₁ andL₂₀₂ are preferably each independently a single bond, or a substitutedor unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms; and

-   -   Ar₂₀₁ and Ar₂₀₂ are preferably each independently a substituted        or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, Ar₂₀₁and Ar₂₀₂ are preferably each independently a phenyl group, a naphthylgroup, phenanthryl group, a biphenyl group, a terphenyl group, adiphenylfluorenyl group, a dimethylfluorenyl group, abenzodiphenylfluorenyl group, a benzodimethylfluorenyl group, adibenzofuranyl group, a dibenzothienyl group, a naphthobenzofuranylgroup, or a naphthobenzothienyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thesecond compound represented by the formula (2) is preferably a compoundrepresented by a formula (201), a formula (202), a formula (203), aformula (204), a formula (205), a formula (206), a formula (207), aformula (208), a formula (209), or a formula (210) below.

In the formulae (201) to (210): L₂₀₁ and Ar₂₀₁ represent the same asL₂₀₁ and Ar₂₀₁ in the formula (2); and

-   -   R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ each independently represent the same as R₂₀₁ to        R₂₀₈ in the formula (2).

It is also preferable that the second compound represented by theformula (2) is a compound represented by a formula (221), a formula(222), a formula (223), a formula (224), a formula (225), a formula(226), a formula (227), a formula (228), or a formula (229) below.

In the formulae (221), (222), (223), (224), (225), (226), (227), (228),and (229):

-   -   R₂₀₁ and R₂₀₃ to R₂₀ each independently represent the same as        R₂₀₁ and R₂₀₃ to R₂₀ in the formula (2);    -   L₂₀₁ and Ar₂₀₁ each represent the same as L₂₀₁ and Ar₂₀₁ in the        formula (2);    -   L₂₀₃ represents the same as L₂₀₁ in the formula (2);    -   L₂₀₃ and L₂₀₁ are mutually the same or different;    -   Ar₂₀₃ represents the same as Ar₂₀₁ in the formula (2); and    -   Ar₂₀₃ and Ar₂₀₁ are mutually the same or different.

It is also preferable that the second compound represented by theformula (2) is a compound represented by a formula (241), a formula(242), a formula (243), a formula (244), a formula (245), a formula(246), a formula (247), a formula (248), or a formula (249) below.

In the formulae (241), (242), (243), (244), (245), (246), (247), (248),and (249):

-   -   R₂₀₁, R₂₀₂, and R₂₀₄ to R₂₀₈ each independently represent the        same as R₂₀₁, R₂₀₂, and R₂₀₄ to R₂₀₈ in the formula (2);    -   L₂₀₁ and Ar₂₀₁ each represent the same as L₂₀₁ and Ar₂₀₁ in the        formula (2);    -   L₂₀₃ represents the same as L₂₀₁ in the formula (2);    -   L₂₀₃ and L₂₀₁ are mutually the same or different;    -   Ar₂₀₃ represents the same as Ar₂₀₁ in the formula (2); and    -   Ar₂₀₃ and Ar₂₀₁ are mutually the same or different.

In the second compound represented by the formula (2), R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ notbeing the group represented by the formula (21) are preferably eachindependently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylgroup having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstitutedcycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a grouprepresented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃).

L₁₀₁ is preferably a single bond, or an unsubstituted arylene grouphaving 6 to 22 ring carbon atoms, and

-   -   Ar₁₀₁ is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group        having 6 to 22 ring carbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, in thesecond compound represented by the formula (2), R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ arepreferably each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or agroup represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, R₂₀₁ toR₂₀₈ in the second compound represented by the formula (2) are eachpreferably a hydrogen atom.

In the second compound, the groups specified to be “substituted orunsubstituted” are each preferably an “unsubstituted” group.

Method of Manufacturing Second Compound

The second compound can be manufactured by a known method. The secondcompound can also be manufactured based on a known method through aknown alternative reaction using a known material(s) tailored for thetarget compound.

Specific Examples of Second Compound

Specific examples of the second compound include, for example, thefollowing compounds. It should however be noted that the invention isnot limited by the specific examples of the second compound.

Fourth Compound and Fifth Compound

The fourth compound and the fifth compound are each independently atleast one compound selected from the group consisting of a compoundrepresented by a formula (3A) below, a compound represented by a formula(4) below, a compound represented by a formula (5) below, a compoundrepresented by a formula (6) below, a compound represented by a formula(7) below, a compound represented by a formula (8) below, a compoundrepresented by a formula (9) below, and a compound represented by aformula (10) below.

Compound Represented by Formula (3A)

The compound represented by formula (3A) will be described below.

In the formula (3A), at least one combination of adjacent two or more ofRa₃₀₁, Ra₃₀₂, Ra₃₀₃, Ra₃₀₄, Ra₃₀₅, Ra₃₀₆, Ra₃₀₇, Ra₃₀₈, Ra₃₀₉ and Ra₃₁₀are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclicring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring,or not mutually bonded; and

-   -   at least one of Ra₃₀₁ to Ra₃₁₀ is a monovalent group represented        by a formula (31A) below, Ra₃₀₁ to Ra₃₁₀ forming neither the        monocyclic ring nor the fused ring and not being the monovalent        group represented by the formula (31A) are each independently a        hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having        1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl        group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50        ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃),        a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by        —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen        atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

In the formula (31A), Ara₃₀₁ and Ara₃₀₂ are each independently asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to50 ring atoms;

-   -   La₃₀₁, La₃₀₂, and La₃₀₃ are each independently a single bond, a        substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent        heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 ring atoms; and    -   * represents a bonding position to a pyrene ring in the formula        (3A).

In the fourth compound and the fifth compound, R₉₀₁, R₉₀₂, R₉₀₃, R₉₀₄,R₉₀₅, R₉₀₆, and R₉₀₇ are each independently a hydrogen atom, asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, asubstituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ringcarbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 50 ring atoms;

-   -   a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₂ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₃ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₄ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₄ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₅ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₅ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₆ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₆ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₇ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₇ are        mutually the same or different.

In the formula (3A), two of Ra₃₀₁ to Ra₃₁₀ are preferably groupsrepresented by the formula (31A).

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (3A)is a compound represented by a formula (33A).

In the formula (33A): Ra₃₁₁, Ra₃₁₂, Ra₃₁₃, Ra₃₁₄, Ra₃₁₅, Ra₃₁₆, Ra₃₁₇and Ra₃₁₈ each independently represent the same as Ra₃₀₁ to Ra₃₁₀ in theformula (3A) that are not the monovalent group represented by theformula (31A);

-   -   La₃₁₁, La₃₁₂, La₃₁₃, La₃₁₄, La₃₁₅ and La₃₁₆ are each        independently a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted        arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted        or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 ring        atoms; and    -   Ara₃₁₂, Ara₃₁₃, Ara₃₁₅ and Ara₃₁₆ are each independently a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In the formula (31A), La₃₀₁ is preferably a single bond, and La₃₀₂ andLa₃₀₃ are preferably single bonds.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (3A)is represented by a formula (34A) or a formula (35A) below.

In the formula (34A), Ra₃₁₁ to Ra₃₁₈ each independently represent thesame as Ra₃₀₁ to Ra₃₁₀ in the formula (3A) that are not the monovalentgroup represented by the formula (31A); La₃₁₂, La₃₁₃, La₃₁₅ and La₃₁₆each independently represent the same as La₃₁₂, La₃₁₃, La₃₁₅ and La₃₁₆in the formula (33A); and Ara₃₁₂, Ara₃₁₃, Ara₃₁₅ and Ara₃₁₆ eachindependently represent the same as Ara₃₁₂, Ara₃₁₃, Ara₃₁₅ and Ara₃₁₆ inthe formula (33A).

In the formula (35A), Ra₃₁₁ to Ra₃₁₈ each independently represent thesame as Ra₃₀₁ to Ra₃₁₀ in the formula (3A) that are not the monovalentgroup represented by the formula (31A); and Ara₃₁₂, Ara₃₁₃, Ara₃₁₅ andAra₃₁₆ each independently represent the same as Ara₃₁₂, Ara₃₁₃, Ara₃₁₅and Ara₃₁₆ in the formula (33A).

In the formula (31A), at least one of Ara₃₀₁ and Ara₃₀₂ is preferably agroup represented by a formula (36A) below.

In the formulae (33A) to (35A), at least one of Ara₃₁₂ and Ara₃₁₃ ispreferably a group represented by the formula (36A).

In the formulae (33A) to (35A), at least one of Ara₃₁₅ and Ara₃₁₆ ispreferably a group represented by the formula (36A).

In the formula (36A), Xa₃ represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom;

-   -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of Ra₃₂₁ to        Ra₃₂₇ are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   Ra₃₂₁, Ra₃₂₂, Ra₃₂₃, Ra₃₂₄, Ra₃₂₅, Ra₃₂₆ and Ra₃₂₇ not forming        the monocyclic ring and not forming the fused ring are each        independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3        to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group        represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇),        a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms; and    -   * represents a bonding position to La₃₀₂, La₃₀₃, La₃₁₂, La₃₁₃,        La₃₁₅ or La₃₁₆.    -   Xa₃ is preferably an oxygen atom.

At least one of Ra₃₂₁ to Ra₃₂₇ is preferably a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substitutedor unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, asubstituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ringcarbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In the formula (31A), Ara₃₀₁ is preferably a group represented by theformula (36A) and Ara₃₀₂ is preferably a substituted or unsubstitutedaryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the formulae (33A) to (35A), Ara₃₁₂ is preferably a group representedby the formula (36A) and Ara₃₁₃ is preferably a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the formulae (33A) to (35A), Ara₃₁₅ is preferably a group representedby the formula (36A) and Ara₃₁₆ is preferably a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (3A)is represented by a formula (37A).

In the formula (37A), Ra₃₁₁ to Ra₃₁₈ each independently represent thesame as Ra₃₀₁ to Ra₃₁₀ in the formula (3A) that are not the monovalentgroup represented by the formula (31A);

-   -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of Ra₃₂₁ to        Ra₃₂₇ are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of Ra₃₄₁ to        Ra₃₄₇ are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   Ra₃₂₁ to Ra₃₂₇ and Ra₃₄₁ to Ra₃₄₇ not forming the monocyclic        ring and not forming the fused ring are each independently a        hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having        1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl        group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50        ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃),        a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by        —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen        atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms; and    -   Ra₃₃₁ to Ra₃₃₅ and Ra₃₅₁ to Ra₃₅₅ are each independently a        hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group        having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50        ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃),        a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by        —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen        atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

Specific Examples of Compound Represented by Formula (3A)

Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (3A)include compounds shown below.

Compound Represented by Formula (4)

The compound represented by the formula (4) will be described below.

In the formula (4): Z are each independently CRa or a nitrogen atom;

-   -   A1 ring and A2 ring are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle        having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   when a plurality of Ra are present, at least one combination of        adjacent two or more of Ra are mutually bonded to form a        substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to        form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually        bonded;    -   n21 and n22 are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4;    -   when a plurality of Rb are present, at least one combination of        adjacent two or more of the plurality of Rb are mutually bonded        to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring, mutually        bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, or not        mutually bonded;    -   when a plurality of Rc are present, at least one combination of        adjacent two or more of plurality of Rc are mutually bonded to        form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring, mutually        bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, or not        mutually bonded; and    -   Ra, Rb, and Rc not forming the monocyclic ring and not forming        the fused ring are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group        represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇),        a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

The “aromatic hydrocarbon ring” for the A1 ring and A2 ring has the samestructure as the compound formed by introducing a hydrogen atom to the“aryl group” described above.

Ring atoms of the “aromatic hydrocarbon ring” for the Al ring and the A₂ring include two carbon atoms on a fused bicyclic structure at thecenter of the formula (4).

Specific examples of the “substituted or unsubstituted aromatichydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms” include a compoundformed by introducing a hydrogen atom to the “aryl group” described inthe specific example group G1.

The “heterocycle” for the A1 ring and A2 ring has the same structure asthe compound formed by introducing a hydrogen atom to the “heterocyclicgroup” described above.

Ring atoms of the “heterocycle” for the A1 ring and the A2 ring includetwo carbon atoms on a fused bicyclic structure at the center of theformula (4).

Specific examples of the “substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclehaving 5 to 50 ring atoms” include a compound formed by introducing ahydrogen atom to the “heterocyclic group” described in the specificexample group G2.

Rb is bonded to any one of carbon atoms forming the aromatic hydrocarbonring as the A1 ring or any one of the atoms forming the heterocycle asthe A1 ring.

Rc is bonded to any one of carbon atoms forming the aromatic hydrocarbonring as the A2 ring or any one of the atoms forming the heterocycle asthe A2 ring.

At least one of Ra, Rb, and Rc is preferably a group represented by theformula (4a) below. More preferably, at least two of Ra, Rb, and Rc aregroups represented by the formula (4a).

[Formula 131]

*-L₄₀₁-Ar₄₀₁  (4a)

In the formula (4a): L₄₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted orunsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30ring atoms; and

-   -   Ar₄₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group        represented by the formula (4b).

In the formula (4b): L₄₀₂ and L₄₀₃ are each independently a single bond,a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 30 ring atoms;

-   -   a combination of Ar₄₀₂ and Ar₄₀₃ is mutually bonded to form a        substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to        form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually        bonded; and    -   Ar₄₀₂ and Ar₄₀₃ not forming the monocyclic ring and not forming        the fused ring are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (4)is represented by a formula (42) below.

In the formula (42): at least one combination of adjacent two or more ofR₄₀₁ to R₄₁₁ are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstitutedmonocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstitutedfused ring, or not mutually bonded; and

-   -   R₄₀₁ to R₄₁₁ not forming the monocyclic ring and not forming the        fused ring are each independently a hydrogen atom, or a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group        represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by        —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented        by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group,        a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

At least one of R₄₀₁ to R₄₁₁ is preferably a group represented by theformula (4a). More preferably, at least two of R₄₀₁ to R₄₁₁ are groupsrepresented by the formula (4a).

-   -   R₄₀₄ and R₄₁₁ are preferably groups represented by the formula        (4a).

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (4)is a compound formed by bonding a moiety represented by a formula (4-1)or a formula (4-2) below to the A1 ring.

Further, in an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by theformula (42) is a compound formed by bonding the moiety represented bythe formula (4-1) or the formula (4-2) to the ring bonded with R₄₀₄ toR₄₀₇.

In the formula (4-1), two bonds * are each independently bonded to thering-forming carbon atom of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring or the ringatom of the heterocycle as the A1 ring in the formula (4) or bonded toone of R₄₀₄ to R₄₀₇ in the formula (42);

-   -   in the formula (4-2), three bonds * are each independently        bonded to the ring-forming carbon atom of the aromatic        hydrocarbon ring or the ring atom of the heterocycle as the A1        ring in the formula (4) or bonded to one of R₄₀₄ to R₄₀₇ in the        formula (42);    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₇        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₄₃₁ to R₄₃₈        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded; and    -   R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₇ and R₄₃₁ to R₄₃₈ not forming the monocyclic ring        and not forming the fused ring are each independently a hydrogen        atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen atom, a cyano        group, a nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group        having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (4)is a compound represented by a formula (41-3), a formula (41-4) or aformula (41-5) below.

In the formulae (41-3), (41-4), and (41-5):

-   -   A1 ring is as defined for the formula (4);    -   R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₇ each independently represent the same as R₄₂₁ to        R₄₂₇ in the formula (4-1); and    -   R₄₄₀ to R₄₄₈ each independently represent the same as R₄₀₁ to        R₄₁₁ in the formula (42).

In an exemplary embodiment, a substituted or unsubstituted aromatichydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms as the A1 ring in theformula (41-5) is a substituted or unsubstituted naphthalene ring, or asubstituted or unsubstituted fluorene ring.

In an exemplary embodiment, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclehaving 5 to 50 ring atoms as the A1 ring in the formula (41-5) is asubstituted or unsubstituted dibenzofuran ring, a substituted orunsubstituted carbazole ring, or a substituted or unsubstituteddibenzothiophene ring.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (4)or the formula (42) is selected from the group consisting of compoundsrepresented by formulae (461) to (467) below.

In the formulae (461), (462), (463), (464), (465), (466), and (467):

-   -   R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₇ each independently represent the same as R₄₂₁ to        R₄₂₇ in the formula (4-1);    -   R₄₃₁ to R₄₃₈ each independently represent the same as R₄₃₁ to        R₄₃₈ in the formula (4-2);    -   R₄₄₀ to R₄₄₈ and R₄₅₁ to R₄₅₄ each independently represent the        same as R₄₀₁ to R₄₁₁ in the formula (42);    -   X₄ is an oxygen atom, NR₈₀₁, or C(R₈₀₂)(R₈₀₃);    -   R₈₀₁, R₈₀₂, and R₈₀₃ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3        to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms;    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₂ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₃ are        mutually the same or different.

In an exemplary embodiment, at least one combination of adjacent two ormore of R₄₀₁ to R₄₁₁ in the compound represented by the formula (42) aremutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring,or mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring.This embodiment will be described in detail below as a compoundrepresented by a formula (45).

Compound Represented by Formula (45)

The compound represented by the formula (45) will be described below.

In the formula (45): two or more of combinations selected from the groupconsisting of a combination of R₄₆₁ and R₄₆₂, a combination of R₄₆₂ andR₄₆₃, a combination of R₄₆₄ and R₄₆₅, a combination of R₄₆₅ and R₄₆₆, acombination of R₄₆₆ and R₄₆₇, a combination of R₄₆₈ and R₄₆₉, acombination of R₄₆₉ and R₄₇₀, and a combination of R₄₇₀ and R₄₇₁ aremutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ringor mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring.

However, the combination of R₄₆₁ and R₄₆₂ and the combination of R₄₆₂and R₄₆₃; the combination of R₄₆₄ and R₄₆₅ and the combination of R₄₆₅and R₄₆₆; the combination of R₄₆₅ and R₄₆₆ and the combination of R₄₆₆and R₄₆₇; the combination of R₄₆₈ and R₄₆₉ and the combination of R₄₆₉and R₄₇₀; and the combination of R₄₆₉ and R₄₇₀ and the combination ofR₄₇₀ and R₄₇₁ do not simultaneously form a ring;

-   -   the two or more rings formed by R₄₆₁ to R₄₇₁ are mutually the        same or different; and    -   R₄₆₁ to R₄₇₁ not forming the monocyclic ring and not forming the        fused ring are each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted        or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group        represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), or —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇); a halogen atom, a        cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In the formula (45), R_(n) and R_(n+1) (n being an integer selected from461, 462, 464 to 466, and 468 to 470) are mutually bonded to form asubstituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring or fused ring together withtwo ring-forming carbon atoms bonded with R_(n) and R_(n+1). The ring ispreferably formed of atoms selected from the group consisting of acarbon atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, and a nitrogen atom, and ismade of 3 to 7, more preferably 5 or 6 atoms.

The number of the above cyclic structures in the compound represented bythe formula (45) is, for instance, 2, 3, or 4. The two or more of thecyclic structures may be present on the same benzene ring on the basicskeleton represented by the formula (45) or may be present on differentbenzene rings. For instance, when three cyclic structures are present,each of the cyclic structures may be present on corresponding one of thethree benzene rings of the formula (45).

Examples of the above cyclic structures in the compound represented bythe formula (45) include structures represented by formulae (451) to(460) below.

In the formulae (451) to (457):

-   -   each combination of *1 and *2, *3 and *4, *5 and *6, *7 and *8,        *9 and *10, *11 and *12, and *13 and *14 represent the two        ring-forming carbon atoms respectively bonded with R_(n) and        R_(n+1);    -   the ring-forming carbon atom bonded with R_(n) may be any one of        the two ring-forming carbon atoms represented by *1 and *2, *3        and *4, *5 and *6, *7 and *8, *9 and *10, *11 and *12, and *13        and *14;    -   X₄₅ is C(R₄₅₁₂)(R₄₅₁₃), NR₄₅₁₄, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur        atom;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₄₅₀₁ to        R₄₅₀₆ and R₄₅₁₂ to R₄₅₁₃ are mutually bonded to form a        substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to        form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually        bonded; and    -   R₄₅₀₁ to R₄₅₁₄ not forming the monocyclic ring and not forming        the fused ring each independently represent the same as R₄₆₁ to        R₄₇₁ in the formula (45).

In the formulae (458) to (460):

-   -   each combination of *1 and *2, and *3 and *4 represent the two        ring-forming carbon atoms each bonded with R_(n) and R_(n+1);    -   the ring-forming carbon atom bonded with R_(n) may be any one of        the two ring-forming carbon atoms represented by *1 and *2, or        *3 and *4; X₄₅ is C(R₄₅₁₂)(R₄₅₁₃), NR₄₅₁₄, an oxygen atom, or a        sulfur atom;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₄₅₁₂ to        R₄₅₁₃ and R₄₅₁₅ to R₄₅₂₅ are mutually bonded to form a        substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to        form a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually        bonded; and    -   R₄₅₁₂ to R₄₅₁₃, R₄₅₁₅ to R₄₅₂₁ and R₄₅₂₂ to R₄₅₂₅, and R₄₅₁₄ not        forming the monocyclic ring and not forming the fused ring each        independently represent the same as R₄₆₁ to R₄₇₁ in the formula        (45).

In the formula (45), it is preferable that at least one of R₄₆₂, R₄₆₄,R₄₆₅, R₄₇₀ or R₄₇₁ (preferably, at least one of R₄₆₂, R₄₆₅ and R₄₇₀,more preferably R₄₆₂) is a group not forming the cyclic structure.

(i) A substituent, if present, of the cyclic structure formed by R_(n)and R_(n+1) of the formula (45), (ii) R₄₆₁ to R₄₇₁ not forming thecyclic structure in the formula (45), and iii) R₄₅₀₁ to R₄₅₁₄, R₄₅₁₅ toR₄₅₂₅ in the formulae (451) to (460) are preferably each independentlyany one of group selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom,a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50ring atoms, or a group represented by formulae (461) to (464) below.

In the formulae (461) to (464):

R_(d) is each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substitutedor unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, asubstituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbonatoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group representedby —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by—N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to50 ring atoms,

-   -   X₄₆ is C(R₈₀₁)(R₈₀₂), NR₈₀₃, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom;    -   R₈₀₁, R₈₀₂, and R₈₀₃ are each independently a hydrogen atom, or        a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3        to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms; when a plurality of R₈₀₁ are present, the        plurality of R₈₀₁ are mutually the same or different,    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₂ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₃ are        mutually the same or different;    -   p1 is 5, p2 is 4, p3 is 3, p4 is 7;    -   in the formulae (461) to (464), * each independently represents        a bonding position to a cyclic structure.

In the fourth and fifth compounds, R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₇ represent the same asR₉₀₁ to R₉₀₇ as described above.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (45)is represented by one of formulae (45-1) to (45-6) below.

In the formulae (45-1) to (45-6):

-   -   rings d to i are each dependently a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring;        and    -   R₄₆₁ to R₄₇₁ each independently represent the same as R₄₆₁ to        R₄₇₁ in the formula (45).

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (45)is represented by one of formulae (45-7) to (45-12) below.

In the formulae (45-7) to (45-12):

-   -   rings d to f, k and j are each dependently a substituted or        unsubstituted monocyclic ring or a substituted or unsubstituted        fused ring; and    -   R₄₆₁ to R₄₇₁ each independently represent the same as R₄₆₁ to        R₄₇₁ in the formula (45).

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (45)is represented by one of formulae (45-13) to (45-21) below.

In the formulae (45-13) to (45-21):

-   -   rings d to k are each dependently a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring or a substituted or unsubstituted fused ring;        and    -   R₄₆₁ to R₄₇₁ each independently represent the same as R₄₆₁ to        R₄₇₁ in the formula (45).

When the ring g or the ring h further has a substituent, examples of thesubstituent include a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by the formula (461), agroup represented by the formula (463), or a group represented by theformula (464).

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (45)is represented by one of formulae (45-22) to (45-25) below.

In the formulae (45-22) to (45-25):

-   -   X₄₆ and X₄₇ are each independently C(R₈₀₁)(R₈₀₂), NR₈₀₃, an        oxygen atom or a sulfur atom;    -   R₄₆₁ to R₄₇₁ and R₄₈₁ to R₄₈₈ each independently represent the        same as R₄₆₁ to R₄₇₁ in the formula (45);    -   R₈₀₁, R₈₀₂, and R₈₀₃ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3        to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms;    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₁ are        mutually the same or different,    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₂ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₃ are        mutually the same or different.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (45)is represented by a formula (45-26) below.

In the formula (45-26): X₄₆ is C(R₈₀₁)(R₈₀₂), NR₈₀₃, an oxygen atom or asulfur atom;

-   -   R₄₆₃, R₄₆₄, R₄₆₇, R₄₆₈, R₄₇₁, and R₄₈₁ to R₄₉₂ each        independently represent the same as R₄₆₁ to R₄₇₁ in the formula        (45);    -   R₈₀₁, R₈₀₂, and R₈₀₃ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3        to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms;    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₁ are        mutually the same or different,    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₂ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₃ are        mutually the same or different.

Specific Examples of Compound Represented by Formula (4)

Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (4) includecompounds shown below. In the specific examples below, Ph represents aphenyl group, and D represents a deutrium atom.

Compound Represented by Formula (5)

The compound represented by the formula (5) will be described below. Thecompound represented by the formula (5) corresponds to the compoundrepresented by the above-described formula (41-3).

In the formula (5): at least one combination of adjacent two or more ofR₅₀₁ to R₅₀₇ and R₅₁₁ to R₅₁₇ are mutually bonded to form a substitutedor unsubstituted monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substitutedor unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;

-   -   R₅₀₁ to R₅₀₇ and R₅₁₁ to R₅₁₇ not forming the monocyclic ring        and not forming the fused ring are each independently a hydrogen        atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen atom, a cyano        group, a nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group        having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; and    -   R₅₂₁ and R₅₂₂ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group        represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by        —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented        by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group,        a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

“A combination of adjacent two or more of R₅₀₁ to R₅₀₇ and R₅₁₁ to R₅₁₇”refers to, for instance, a pair of R₅₀₁ and R₅₀₂, a pair of R₅₀₂ andR₅₀₃, a pair of R₅₀₃ and R₅₀₄, a pair of R₅₀₅ and R₅₀₆, a pair of R₅₀₆and R₅₀₇, and a combination of R₅₀₁, R₅₀₂, and R₅₀₃.

In an exemplary embodiment, at least one, preferably two of R₅₀₁ to R₅₀₇and R₅₁₁ to R₅₁₇ are groups represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇).

In an exemplary embodiment, R₅₀₁ to R₅₀₇ and R₅₁₁ to R₅₁₇ are eachindependently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl grouphaving 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstitutedheterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (5)is a compound represented by a formula (52) below.

In the formula (52): at least one combination of adjacent two or more ofR₅₃₁ to R₅₃₄ and R₅₄₁ to R₅₄₄ are mutually bonded to form a substitutedor unsubstituted monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substitutedor unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;

-   -   R₅₃₁ to R₅₃₄, R₅₄₁ to R₅₄₄, and R₅₅₁ to R₅₅₂ not forming the        monocyclic ring and not forming the fused ring are each        independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted        aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; and    -   R₅₆₁ to R₅₆₄ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (5)is a compound represented by a formula (53) below.

In the formula (53), R₅₅₁, R₅₅₂ and R₅₆₁ to R₅₆₄ each independentlyrepresent the same as R₅₅₁, R₅₅₂ and R₅₆₁ to R₅₆₄ in the formula (52).

In an exemplary embodiment, R₅₆₁ to R₅₆₄ in the formulae (52) and (53)are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having6 to 50 ring carbon atoms (preferably a phenyl group).

In an exemplary embodiment, R₅₂₁ and R₅₂₂ in the formula (5), and R₅₅₁and R₅₅₂ in the formulae (52) and (53) are each a hydrogen atom.

In an exemplary embodiment, a substituent for the substituted orunsubstituted group in the formulae (5), (52) and (53) is a substitutedor unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substitutedor unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, asubstituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ringcarbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 50 ring atoms,

Specific Examples of Compound Represented by Formula (5)

Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (5) includecompounds shown below.

Compound Represented by Formula (6)

The compound represented by the formula (6) will be described below.

In the formula (6): a ring, b ring and c ring are each independently asubstituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5to 50 ring atoms;

-   -   R₆₀₁ and R₆₀₂ are each independently bonded with the a ring, b        ring, or c ring to form a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle or to form no substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle; and    -   R₆₀₁ and R₆₀₂ not forming the substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

The a ring, b ring and c ring are each a ring (a substituted orunsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 ringatoms) fused with the fused bicyclic moiety formed of a boron atom andtwo nitrogen atoms at the center of the formula (6).

The “aromatic hydrocarbon ring” for the a, b, and c rings has the samestructure as the compound formed by introducing a hydrogen atom to the“aryl group” described above.

Ring atoms of the “aromatic hydrocarbon ring” for the a ring includethree carbon atoms on the fused bicyclic structure at the center of theformula (6).

Ring atoms of the “aromatic hydrocarbon ring” for the b ring and the cring include two carbon atoms on a fused bicyclic structure at thecenter of the formula (6).

Specific examples of the “substituted or unsubstituted aromatichydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms” include a compoundformed by introducing a hydrogen atom to the “aryl group” described inthe specific example group G1.

The “heterocycle” for the a, b, and c rings has the same structure asthe compound formed by introducing a hydrogen atom to the “heterocyclicgroup” described above.

Ring atoms of the “heterocycle” for the a ring include three carbonatoms on the fused bicyclic structure at the center of the formula (6).Ring atoms of the “heterocycle” for the b ring and the c ring includetwo carbon atoms on a fused bicyclic structure at the center of theformula (6). Specific examples of the “substituted or unsubstitutedheterocycle having 5 to 50 ring atoms” include a compound formed byintroducing a hydrogen atom to the “heterocyclic group” described in thespecific example group G2.

R₆₀₁ and R₆₀₂ are optionally each independently bonded with the a ring,b ring, or c ring to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle.The “heterocycle” in this arrangement includes the nitrogen atom on thefused bicyclic structure at the center of the formula (6). Theheterocycle in the above arrangement optionally include a hetero atomother than the nitrogen atom. R₆₀₁ and R₆₀₂ bonded with the a ring, bring, or c ring specifically means that atoms forming R₆₀₁ and R₆₀₂ arebonded with atoms forming the a ring, b ring, or c ring. For instance,R₆₀₁ may be bonded to the a ring to form a bicyclic (or tri-or-morecyclic) fused nitrogen-containing heterocycle, in which the ringincluding R₆₀₁ and the a ring are fused. Specific examples of thenitrogen-containing heterocycle include a compound corresponding to thenitrogen-containing bi(or-more)cyclic fused heterocyclic group in thespecific example group G2.

The same applies to R₆₀₁ bonded with the b ring, R₆₀₂ bonded with the aring, and R₆₀₂ bonded with the c ring.

In an exemplary embodiment, the a ring, b ring and c ring in the formula(6) are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted aromatichydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the a ring, b ring and c ring in the formula(6) are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ringor a substituted or unsubstituted naphthalene ring.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₀₁ and R₆₀₂ in the formula (6) are eachindependently a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 50 ring atoms, preferably a substituted or unsubstitutedaryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (6)is a compound represented by a formula (62) below.

In the formula (62): R_(601A) is bonded with at least one of R₆₁₁ orR₆₂₁ to form a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle or to form nosubstituted or unsubstituted heterocycle;

-   -   R_(602A) is bonded with at least one of R₆₁₃ or R₆₁₄ to form a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle or to form no        substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle;    -   R_(601A) and R_(602A) not forming the substituted or        unsubstituted heterocycle are each independently a substituted        or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₆₁₁ to R₆₂₁        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded; and    -   R₆₁₁ to R₆₂₁ not forming the substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle, not forming the monocyclic ring and not forming the        fused ring are each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted        or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group        represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇),        a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

R_(601A) and R_(602A) in the formula (62) are groups corresponding toR₆₀₁ and R₆₀₂ in the formula (6), respectively.

For instance, R_(601A) and R₆₁₁ are optionally bonded with each other toform a bicyclic (or tri-or-more cyclic) fused nitrogen-containingheterocycle, in which the ring including R_(601A) and R₆₁₁ and a benzenering corresponding to the a ring are fused. Specific examples of thenitrogen-containing heterocycle include a compound corresponding to thenitrogen-containing bi(or-more)cyclic fused heterocyclic group in thespecific example group G2. The same applies to R_(601A) bonded withR₆₂₁, R_(602A) bonded with R₆₁₃, and R_(602A) bonded with R₆₁₄.

At least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₆₁₁ to R₆₂₁ areoptionally mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstitutedmonocyclic ring, or mutually bonded to form a substituted orunsubstituted fused ring.

For instance, R₆₁₁ and R₆₁₂ are optionally mutually bonded to form astructure in which a benzene ring, indole ring, pyrrole ring, benzofuranring, benzothiophene ring or the like is fused to the six-membered ringbonded with R₆₁₁ and R₆₁₂, the resultant fused ring forming anaphthalene ring, carbazole ring, indole ring, dibenzofuran ring, ordibenzothiophene ring, respectively.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₁₁ to R₆₂₁, which do not contribute toring formation, are each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ringatoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₁₁ to R₆₂₁, which do not contribute toring formation, are each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ringatoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₁₁ to R₆₂₁, which do not contribute toring formation, are each independently a hydrogen atom, or a substitutedor unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₁₁ to R₆₂₁, which do not contribute toring formation, are each independently a hydrogen atom, or a substitutedor unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and

-   -   at least one of R₆₁₁ to R₆₂₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted        alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (62)is a compound represented by a formula (63) below.

In the formula (63): R₆₃₁ is bonded with R₆₄₆ to form a substituted orunsubstituted heterocycle or to form no substituted or unsubstitutedheterocycle;

-   -   R₆₃₃ is bonded with R₆₄₇ to form a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle or to form no substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle;    -   R₆₃₄ is bonded with R₆₅₁ to form a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle or to form no substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle;    -   R₆₄₁ is bonded with R₆₄₂ to form a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle or to form no substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₆₃₁ to R₆₅₁        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded; and    -   R₆₃₁ to R₆₅₁ not forming the substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle, not forming the monocyclic ring and not forming the        fused ring are each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted        or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group        represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇),        a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

R₆₃₁ are optionally mutually bonded with R₆₄₆ to form a substituted orunsubstituted heterocycle. For instance, R₆₃₁ and R₆₄₆ are optionallybonded with each other to form a tri-or-more cyclic fusednitrogen-containing heterocycle, in which a benzene ring bonded withR₆₄₆, a ring including a nitrogen atom, and a benzene ring correspondingto the a ring are fused. Specific examples of the nitrogen-containingheterocycle include a compound corresponding to the nitrogen-containingtri(-or-more)cyclic fused heterocyclic group in the specific examplegroup G2. The same applies to R₆₃₃ bonded with R₆₄₇, R₆₃₄ bonded withR₆₅₁, and R₆₄₁ bonded with R₆₄₂.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₃₁ to R₆₅₁, which do not contribute toring formation, are each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ringatoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₃₁ to R₆₅₁, which do not contribute toring formation, are each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ringatoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₃₁ to R₆₅₁, which do not contribute toring formation, are each independently a hydrogen atom, or a substitutedor unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₃₁ to R₆₅₁, which do not contribute toring formation, are each independently a hydrogen atom, or a substitutedor unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, and at leastone of R₆₃₁ to R₆₅₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (63)is a compound represented by a formula (63A) below.

In the formula (63A): R₆₆₁ is a hydrogen atom, a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substitutedor unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, asubstituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ringcarbon atoms,

-   -   R₆₆₂ to R₆₆₅ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₆₁ to R₆₆₅ are each independently asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, ora substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₆₁ to R₆₆₅ are each independently asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (63)is a compound represented by a formula (63B) below.

In the formula (63B): R₆₇₁ and R₆₇₂ are each independently a hydrogenatom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), or asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms; and

-   -   R₆₇₃ to R₆₇₅ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group        having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (63)is a compound represented by a formula (63B′) below.

In the formula (63B′), R₆₇₂ to R₆₇₅ each independently represent thesame as R₆₇₂ to R₆₇₅ in the formula (63B).

In an exemplary embodiment, at least one of R₆₇₁ to R₆₇₅ is: asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, asubstituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms,a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), or asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms.

In an exemplary embodiment: R₆₇₂ is a hydrogen atom, a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a grouprepresented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), or a substituted or unsubstituted arylgroup having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms; and

-   -   R₆₇₁, and R₆₇₃ to R₆₇₅ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a group        represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), or a substituted or unsubstituted        aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (63)is a compound represented by a formula (63C) below.

In the formula (63C): R₆₈₁ and R₆₈₂ are each independently a hydrogenatom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl grouphaving 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

R₆₈₃ to R₆₈₆ are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted alkylgroup having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstitutedalkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substitutedor unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (63)is a compound represented by a formula (63C′) below.

In the formula (63C′), R₆₈₃ to R₆₈₆ each independently represent thesame as R₆₈₃ to R₆₈₆ in the formula (63C).

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₈₁ to R₆₈₆ are each independently asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, ora substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₆₈₁ to R₆₈₆ are each independently asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms.

The compound represented by the formula (6) is producible by initiallybonding the a ring, b ring and c ring with linking groups (a groupincluding N—R₆₀₁ and a group including N—R₆₀₂) to form an intermediate(first reaction), and bonding the a ring, b ring and c ring with alinking group (a group including a boron atom) to form a final product(second reaction). In the first reaction, an amination reaction (e.g.Buchwald-Hartwig reaction) is applicable. In the second reaction, TandemHetero-Friedel-Crafts Reactions or the like is applicable.

Specific Examples of Compound Represented by Formula (6)

Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (6) areshown below. It should however be noted that these specific examples aremerely exemplary and do not limit the compound represented by theformula (6).

Compound Represented by Formula (7)

The compound represented by the formula (7) will be described below.

In the formula (7): r ring is a ring represented by the formula (72) orthe formula (73), the r ring being fused with at any position(s) ofrespective adjacent rings;

-   -   q ring and s ring are each independently a ring represented by        the formula (74) and fused with any position(s) of respective        adjacent rings;    -   p ring and t ring are each independently a moiety represented by        the formula (75) or the formula (76) and fused with any        position(s) of respective adjacent rings;    -   X₇ is an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NR₇₀₂;    -   when a plurality of R₇₀₁ are present, adjacent ones of the        plurality of R₇₀₁ are mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a        substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   R₇₀₁ and R₇₀₂ not forming the monocyclic ring and not forming        the fused ring are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group        represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇),        a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms;    -   Ar₇₀₁ and Ar₇₀₂ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   L₇₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenylene        group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkynylene group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkylene group having 3 to 50        ring carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group        having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring        atoms;    -   m1 is 0, 1, or 2;    -   m2 is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;    -   m3 is each independently 0, 1, 2, 3 or 3;    -   m4 is each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;    -   when a plurality of R₇₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₇₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of X₇ are present, the plurality of X₇ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₇₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₇₀₂ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of Ar₇₀₁ are present, the plurality of Ar₇₀₁        are mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of Ar₇₀₂ are present, the plurality of Ar₇₀₂        are mutually the same or different; and    -   when a plurality of L₇₀₁ are present, the plurality of L₇₀₁ are        mutually the same or different.

In the formula (7), each of the p ring, q ring, r ring, s ring, and tring is fused with an adjacent ring(s) sharing two carbon atoms. Thefused position and orientation are not limited but may be defined asrequired.

In an exemplary embodiment, in the formula (72) or the formula (73)representing the r ring, m1=0 or m2=0.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (7)is represented by any one of formulae (71-1) to (71-6) below.

In the formulae (71-1) to (71-6), R₇₀₁, X₇, Ar₇₀₁, Ar₇₀₂, L₇₀₁, m1 andm3 respectively represent the same as R₇₀₁, X₇, Ar₇₀₁, Ar₇₀₂, L₇₀₁, m1and m3 in the formula (7).

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (7)is represented by any one of formulae (71-11) to (71-13) below.

In the formulae (71-11) to (71-13), R₇₀₁, X₇, Ar₇₀₁, Ar₇₀₂, L₇₀₁, m1, m3and m4 respectively represent the same as R₇₀₁, X₇, Ar₇₀₁, Ar₇₀₂, L₇₀₁,m1, m3 and m4 in the formula (7).

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (7)is represented by any one of formulae (71-21) to (71-25) below.

In the formulae (71-21) to (71-25), R₇₀₁, X₇, Ar₇₀₁, Ar₇₀₂, L₇₀₁, m1,and m4 respectively represent the same as R₇₀₁, X₇, Ar₇₀₁, Ar₇₀₂, L₇₀₁,m1, and m4 in the formula (7).

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (7)is represented by any one of formulae (71-31) to (71-33) below.

In the formulae (71-31) to (71-33), R₇₀₁, X₇, Ar₇₀₁, Ar₇₀₂, L₇₀₁, and m2to m4 respectively represent the same as R₇₀₁, X₇, Ar₇₀₁, Ar₇₀₂, L₇₀₁,and m2 to m4 in the formula (7).

In an exemplary embodiment, Ar₇₀₁ and Ar₇₀₂ are each independently asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, one of Ar₇₀₁ and Ar₇₀₂ is a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, and the otherof Ar₇₀₁ and Ar₇₀₂ is a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 50 ring atoms.

Specific Examples of Compound Represented by Formula (7)

Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (7) includecompounds shown below.

Compound Represented by Formula (8)

The compound represented by the formula (8) will be described below.

In the formula (8): at least one combination of R₈₀₁ and R₈₀₂, R₈₀₂ andR_(803,) or R₈₀₃ and R₈₀₄ are mutually bonded to form a divalent grouprepresented by a formula (82) below, or not mutually bonded; and

-   -   at least one combination of R₈₀₅ and R₈₀₆, R₈₀₆ and R₈₀₇, or        R₈₀₇ and R₈₀₈ are mutually bonded to form a divalent group        represented by a formula (83) below, or not mutually bonded.

At least one of R₈₀₁ to R₈₀₄ or R₈₁₁ to R₈₁₄ not forming the divalentgroup represented by the formula (82) is a monovalent group representedby a formula (84) below;

-   -   at least one of R₈₀₅ to R₈₀₈ or R₈₂₁ to R₈₂₄ not forming the        divalent group represented by the formula (83) is a monovalent        group represented by the formula (84);    -   X₈ is CR₈₁R₈₂, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NR₈₀₉;    -   a pair of R₈₁ and R₈₂ are mutually bonded to form a substituted        or unsubstituted monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a        substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;        and    -   R₈₀₁ to R₈₀₈ not forming the divalent groups represented by the        formula (82) and (83) and not being the monovalent group        represented by the formula (84), R₈₁₁ to R₈₁₄ and R₈₂₁ to R₈₂₄        not being the monovalent group represented by the formula (84),        R₈₁ and R₈₂ not forming the substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring and not forming the substituted or unsubstituted        fused ring, and R₈₀₉ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group        represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by        —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented        by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group,        a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In the formula (84): Ar₈₀₁ and Ar₈₀₂ are each independently asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to50 ring atoms;

-   -   L₈₀₁ to L₈₀₃ are each independently a single bond, a substituted        or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms,        a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group        having 5 to 30 ring atoms, or a divalent linking group formed by        bonding two, three or four groups selected from the group        consisting of a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group        having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms and a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 ring        atoms; and    -   * in the formula (84) represents a bonding position to a cyclic        structure represented by the formula (8) or a group represented        by the formula (82) or the formula (83).

It is also preferable that at least one combination of R₈₀₁ and R₈₀₂,R₈₀₂ and R₈₀₃, or R₈₀₃ and R₈₀₄ are mutually bonded, and R₈₀₅ and R₈₀₆,R₈₀₆ and R₈₀₇, and R₈₀₇ and R₈₀₈ are not mutually bonded.

It is also preferable that R₈₀₁ and R₈₀₂, R₈₀₂ and R₈₀₃, and R₈₀₃ andR₈₀₄ are not mutually bonded, and at least one combination of R₈₀₅ andR₈₀₆, R₈₀₆ and R₈₀₇, or R₈₀₇ and R₈₀₈ are mutually bonded.

It is also preferable that at least one combination of R₈₀₁ and R₈₀₂,R₈₀₂ and R₈₀₃, or R₈₀₃ and R₈₀₄ are mutually bonded to form a divalentgroup represented by the formula (82), and at least one combination ofR₈₀₅ and R₈₀₆, R₈₀₆ and R₈₀₇, or R₈₀₇ and R₈₀₈ are mutually bonded toform a divalent group represented by the formula (83).

In the formula (8), the positions for the divalent group represented bythe formula (82) and the divalent group represented by the formula (83)to be formed are not specifically limited but the divalent groups may beformed at any possible positions on R₈₀₁ to R₈₀₈.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (8)is represented by any one of formulae (81A-1) to (81A-3) below.

In the formulae (81A-1) to (81A-3):

-   -   X₈ represents the same as X₈ in the formula (8);    -   at least one of R₈₀₃, R₈₀₄, or R₈₁₁ to R₈₁₄ in the formula        (81A-1) is a monovalent group represented by the formula (84);    -   at least one of R₈₀₁, R₈₀₄, or R₈₁₁ to R₈₁₄ in the formula        (81A-2) is a monovalent group represented by the formula (84);    -   at least one of R₈₀₁, R₈₀₂, or R₈₁₁ to R₈₁₄ in the formula        (81A-3) is a monovalent group represented by the formula (84);    -   at least one of R₈₀₅ to R₈₀₈ in the formulae (81A-1) to (81A-3)        is a monovalent group represented by the formula (84); and    -   R₈₀₁ to R₈₀₈ and R₈₁₁ to R₈₁₄ not being the monovalent group        represented by the formula (84) are each independently a        hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having        1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl        group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50        ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃),        a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by        —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen        atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (8)is represented by any one of formulae (81-1) to (81-6) below.

In the formulae (81-1) to (81-6):

-   -   X₈ represents the same as X₈ in the formula (8);    -   at least two of R₈₀₁ to R₈₂₄ are each a monovalent group        represented by the formula (84); and    -   R₈₀₁ to R₈₂₄ that are not the monovalent group represented by        the formula (84) are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group        represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by        —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented        by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group,        a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (8)is represented by any one of formulae (81-7) to (81-18) below.

In the formulae (81-7) to (81-18):

-   -   X₈ represents the same as X₈ in the formula (8);    -   * is a single bond to be bonded with a monovalent group        represented by the formula (84); and    -   R₈₀₁ to R₈₂₄ each independently represent the same as R₈₀₁ to        R₈₂₄ in the formulae (81-1) to (81-6) that are not a monovalent        group represented by the formula (84).

R₈₀₁ to R₈₀₈ not forming the divalent groups represented by the formula(82) and (83) and not being the monovalent group represented by theformula (84), and R₈₁₁ to R₈₁₄ and R₈₂₁ to R₈₂₄ not being the monovalentgroup represented by the formula (84) are preferably each independentlya hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl grouphaving 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylgroup having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted orunsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

The monovalent group represented by the formula (84) is preferablyrepresented by a formula (85) or (86) below.

In the formula (85): R₈₃₁ to R₈₄₀ are each independently a hydrogenatom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃),a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), agroup represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen atom, a cyano group, anitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 50 ring atoms; and

-   -   * in the formula (85) represents the same as * in the formula        (84).

In the formula (86): Ar₈₀₁, L₈₀₁, and L₈₀₃ represent the same as Ar₈₀₁,L₈₀₁, and L₈₀₃ in the formula (84); and

-   -   HAr₈₀₁ is a moiety represented by a formula (87) below.

In the formula (87): X₈₁ represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom;

-   -   one of R₈₄₁ to R₈₄₈ is a single bond with L₈₀₃; and    -   R₈₄₁ to R₈₄₈ not being the single bond are each independently a        hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having        1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl        group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50        ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃),        a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by        —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen        atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms.

Specific Examples of Compound Represented by Formula (8)

Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (8) includecompounds shown below as well as the compounds disclosed in WO2014/104144.

Compound Represented by Formula (9)

The compound represented by the formula (9) will be described below.

In the formula (9): A₉₁ ring and A₉₂ ring are each independently asubstituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocycle having 5to 50 ring atoms; and

-   -   at least one of A₉₁ ring or A₉₂ ring is bonded with * in a        moiety represented by a formula (92) below.

In the formula (92): A₉₃ ring is a substituted or unsubstituted aromatichydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms or a substituted orunsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 ring atoms;

-   -   X₉ is NR₉₃, C(R₉₄)(R₉₅), Si(R₉₆)(R₉₇), Ge(R₉₈)(R₉₉), an oxygen        atom, a sulfur atom, or a selenium atom;    -   R₉₁ and R₉₂ are mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a        substituted or unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;        and    -   R₉₁ and R₉₂, and R₉₃ to R₉₉ not forming the monocyclic ring and        not forming the fused ring are each independently a hydrogen        atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen atom, a cyano        group, a nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group        having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

At least one ring selected from the group consisting of A₉₁ ring and A₉₂ring is bonded to a bond * of the moiety represented by the formula(92). In other words, the ring-forming carbon atoms of the aromatichydrocarbon ring or the ring atoms of the heterocycle of the A₉₁ ring inan exemplary embodiment are bonded to the bonds * in the moietyrepresented by the formula (92). Further, the ring-forming carbon atomsof the aromatic hydrocarbon ring or the ring atoms of the heterocycle ofthe A₉₂ ring in an exemplary embodiment are bonded to the bonds * in themoiety represented by the formula (92).

In an exemplary embodiment, the group represented by a formula (93)below is bonded to one or both of the A₉₁ ring and A₉₂ ring.

In the formula (93): Ar₉₁ and Ar₉₂ are each independently a substitutedor unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ringatoms;

-   -   L₉₁ to L₉₃ are each independently a single bond, a substituted        or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms,        a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group        having 5 to 30 ring atoms, or a divalent linking group formed by        bonding two, three or four groups selected from the group        consisting of a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group        having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms and a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 ring        atoms; and    -   * in the formula (93) represents a bonding position to one of        A₉₁ ring and A₉₂ ring.

In an exemplary embodiment, in addition to the A₉₁ ring, thering-forming carbon atoms of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring or the ringatoms of the heterocycle of the A₉₂ ring are bonded to * in the moietyrepresented by the formula (92). In this case, the moieties representedby the formula (92) are mutually the same or different.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₉₁ and R₉₂ are each independently asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₉₁ and R₉₂ are mutually bonded to form afluorene structure.

In an exemplary embodiment, the rings A₉₁ and A₉₂ are each independentlya substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50ring carbon atoms, example of which is a substituted or unsubstitutedbenzene ring.

In an exemplary embodiment, the ring A₉₃ is a substituted orunsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms, example of which is a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring.

In an exemplary embodiment, X₉ is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.

Specific Examples of Compound Represented by Formula (9)

Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (9) includecompounds shown below.

Compound Represented by Formula (10)

The compound represented by the formula (10) will be described below.

In the formula (10), Ax₁ ring is a ring represented by the formula (10a)and fused with any positions of adjacent rings;

-   -   Ax₂ ring is a ring represented by the formula (10b) and fused        with any positions of adjacent rings;    -   two * in the formula (10b) are bonded to any position of Ax₃        ring;    -   X_(A) and X_(B) are each independently C(R₁₀₀₃)(R₁₀₀₄),        Si(R₁₀₀₅)(R₁₀₀₆), an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom;    -   Ax₃ ring is a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon        ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocycle having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   Ar₁₀₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   R₁₀₀₁ to R₁₀₀₆ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group        represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by        —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented        by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group,        a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mx1 is 3, mx2 is 2;    -   a plurality of R₁₀₀₁ are are mutually the same or different;    -   a plurality of R₁₀₀₂ are mutually the same or different;    -   ax is 0, 1, or 2;    -   when ax is 0 or 1, the structures enclosed by brackets indicated        by “3-ax” are mutually the same or different; and    -   when ax is 2, a plurality of Ar₁₀₀₁ are mutually the same or        different.

In an exemplary embodiment, Ar₁₀₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstitutedaryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, Ax₃ ring is a substituted or unsubstitutedaromatic hydrocarbon ring having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, example ofwhich is a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring, a substituted orunsubstituted naphthalene ring, or a substituted or unsubstitutedanthracene ring.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₁₀₀₃ and R₁₀₀₄ are each independently asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, ax is 1.

Specific Examples of Compound Represented by Formula (10)

Specific examples of the compound represented by the formula (10)include compounds shown below.

In an exemplary embodiment, the emitting layer contains, as the fourthcompound and the fifth compound, at least one compound selected from thegroup consisting of the compound represented by the formula (4), thecompound represented by the formula (5), the compound represented by theformula (7), the compound represented by the formula (8), the compoundrepresented by the formula (9), and a compound represented by a formula(63a) below.

In the formula (63a): R₆₃₁ is bonded with R₆₄₆ to form a substituted orunsubstituted heterocycle or to form no substituted or unsubstitutedheterocycle;

-   -   R₆₃₃ is bonded with R₆₄₇ to form a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle or to form no substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle;    -   R₆₃₄ is bonded with R₆₅₁ to form a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle or to form no substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle;    -   R₆₄₁ is bonded with R₆₄₂ to form a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle or to form no substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₆₃₁ to R₆₅₁        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   R₆₃₁ to R₆₅₁ not forming the substituted or unsubstituted        heterocycle, not forming the monocyclic ring and not forming the        fused ring are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen        atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group        represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇),        a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; and    -   at least one of R₆₃₁ to R₆₅₁ not forming the substituted or        unsubstituted heterocycle, not forming the monocyclic ring and        not forming the fused ring are a halogen atom, a cyano group, a        nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), a halogen atom, a cyano        group, a nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group        having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (4)is the compound represented by the formula (41-3), the formula (41-4) orthe formula (41-5), the A1 ring in the formula (41-5) being asubstituted or unsubstituted fused aromatic hydrocarbon ring having 10to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted fusedheterocycle having 8 to 50 ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the substituted or unsubstituted fusedaromatic hydrocarbon ring having 10 to 50 ring carbon atoms in theformulae (41-3), (41-4) and (41-5) is a substituted or unsubstitutednaphthalene ring, a substituted or unsubstituted anthracene ring, or asubstituted or unsubstituted fluorene ring; and

-   -   the substituted or unsubstituted fused heterocycle having 8 to        50 ring atoms is a substituted or unsubstituted dibenzofuran        ring, a substituted or unsubstituted carbazole ring, or a        substituted or unsubstituted dibenzothiophene ring.

In an exemplary embodiment, the substituted or unsubstituted fusedaromatic hydrocarbon ring having 10 to 50 ring carbon atoms in theformula (41-3), (41-4) or (41-5) is a substituted or unsubstitutednaphthalene ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted fluorene ring; and

-   -   the substituted or unsubstituted fused heterocycle having 8 to        50 ring atoms is a substituted or unsubstituted dibenzofuran        ring, a substituted or unsubstituted carbazole ring, or a        substituted or unsubstituted dibenzothiophene ring.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula (4)is selected from the group consisting of a compound represented by aformula (461) below, a compound represented by a formula (462) below, acompound represented by a formula (463) below, a compound represented bya formula (464) below, a compound represented by a formula (465) below,a compound represented by a formula (466) below, and a compoundrepresented by a formula (467) below.

In the formulae (461) to (467): at least one combination of adjacent twoor more of moieties selected from R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₇, R₄₃₁ to R₄₃₆, R₄₄₀ toR₄₄₈, and R₄₅₁ to R₄₅₄ are mutually bonded to form a substituted orunsubstituted monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted orunsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;

-   -   R₄₃₇, R₄₃₈, and R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₇, R₄₃₁ to R₄₃₆, R₄₄₀ to R₄₄₈, and        R₄₅₁ to R₄₅₄ not forming the monocyclic ring and not forming the        fused ring are each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted        or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group        represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇),        a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50        ring atoms;    -   X₄ is an oxygen atom, NR₈₀₁, or C(R₈₀₂)(R₈₀₃);    -   R₈₀₁, R₈₀₂, and R₈₀₃ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3        to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms;    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₁ are        mutually the same or different,    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₂ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₃ are        mutually the same or different.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₇ and R₄₄₀ to R₄₄₅ are eachindependently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl grouphaving 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstitutedheterocyclic group having to 50 ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₇ and R₄₄₀ to R₄₄₇ are eachindependently selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom, asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 18 ring carbonatoms, and a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to18 ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula(41-3) is a compound represented by a formula (41-3-1) below.

In the formula (41-3-1), R₄₂₃, R₄₂₅, R₄₂₆, R₄₄₂, R₄₄₄ and R₄₄₅ eachindependently represent the same as R₄₂₃, R₄₂₅, R₄₂₆, R₄₄₂, R₄₄₄ andR₄₄₅ in the formula (41-3).

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula(41-3) is represented by a formula (41-3-2) below.

In the formula (41-3-2), R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₇ and R₄₄₀ to R₄₄₅ eachindependently represent the same as R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₇ and R₄₄₀ to R₄₄₅ in theformula (41-3), at least one of R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₇ or R₄₄₀ to R₄₄₆ is a grouprepresented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇).

In an exemplary embodiment, two of R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₇ and R₄₄₀ to R₄₄₆ in theformula (41-3-2) are groups represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇).

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula(41-3-2) is a compound represented by a formula (41-3-3) below.

In the formula (41-3-3), R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₄, R₄₄₀ to R₄₄₃, R₄₄₇, and R₄₄₈ eachindependently represent the same as R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₄, R₄₄₀ to R₄₄₃, R₄₄₇,and R₄₄₈ in the formula (41-3), and

-   -   R_(A), R_(B), R_(C), and R_(D) are each independently a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 18 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 18 ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, the compound represented by the formula(41-3-3) is a compound represented by a formula (41-3-4) below.

In the formula (41-3-4), R₄₄₇, R₄₄₈, R_(A), R_(B), R_(C) and R_(D) eachindependently represent the same as R₄₄₇, R₄₄₈, R_(A), R_(B), R_(C) andR_(D) in the formula (41-3-3).

In an exemplary embodiment, R_(A), R_(B), R_(C), and R_(D) are eachindependently a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 18ring carbon atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, R_(A), R_(B), R_(C), and R_(D) are eachindependently a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group.

In an exemplary embodiment, R₄₄₇ and R₄₄₈ are each a hydrogen atom.

In an exemplary embodiment, a substituent “for the substituted orunsubstituted” group in each of the formulae is an unsubstituted alkylgroup having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, an unsubstituted alkenyl group having2 to 50 carbon atoms, an unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50carbon atoms, an unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ringcarbon atoms, —Si(R_(901a))(R_(902a))(R_(903a)), —O—(R_(904a)),—S—(R_(905a)), —N(R_(906a))(R_(907a)), a halogen atom, a cyano group, anitro group, an unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms, or an unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;

-   -   R_(901a) to R_(907a) are each independently a hydrogen atom, an        unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, an        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or an        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   when two or more R_(901a) are present, the two or more R_(901a)        are mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more R_(902a) are present, the two or more R_(902a)        are mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more R_(903a) are present, the two or more R_(903a)        are mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more R_(904a) are present, the two or more R_(904a)        are mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more R_(905a) are present, the two or more R_(905a)        are mutually the same or different; when two or more R_(906a)        are present, the two or more R_(906a) are mutually the same or        different; and    -   when two or more R_(907a) are present, the two or more R_(907a)        are mutually the same or different.

In an exemplary embodiment, a substituent for the substituted orunsubstituted group in each of the formulae is an unsubstituted alkylgroup having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, an unsubstituted aryl group having 6to 50 ring carbon atoms, or an unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5to 50 ring atoms.

In an exemplary embodiment, a substituent for the substituted orunsubstituted group in each of the formulae is an unsubstituted alkylgroup having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an unsubstituted aryl group having 6to 18 ring carbon atoms, or an unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5to 18 ring atoms.

In the fourth and fifth compounds, it is preferable that all groupsdescribed as “substituted or unsubstituted” groups are “unsubstituted”groups.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the fourthcompound is preferably a compound that emits light having a maximum peakwavelength in a range from 430 nm to 480 nm.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the fifth compoundis preferably a compound that emits light having a maximum peakwavelength in a range from 430 nm to 480 nm.

A measurement method of the maximum peak wavelength of a compound is asfollows. A toluene solution of a measurement target compound at aconcentration ranging from 10⁻⁶ mol/L to 10⁻⁵ mol/L is prepared and putin a quartz cell. An emission spectrum (ordinate axis: luminousintensity, abscissa axis: wavelength) of the thus-obtained sample ismeasured at a normal temperature (300K). The emission spectrum ismeasurable using a spectrophotometer (machine name: F-7000) manufacturedby Hitachi High-Tech Science Corporation. It should be noted that themachine for measuring the emission spectrum is not limited to themachine used herein.

A peak wavelength of the emission spectrum exhibiting the maximumluminous intensity is defined as the maximum peak wavelength. Herein,the maximum peak wavelength of fluorescence is sometimes referred to asthe maximum fluorescence peak wavelength (FL-peak).

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, when the firstemitting layer contains the first compound and the fifth compound, asinglet energy S₁(H1) of the first compound and a singlet energy S₁(D5)of the fifth compound preferably satisfy a relationship of a numericalformula (Numerical Formula 1) below.

S ₁(H1)>S ₁(D5)  (Numerical Formula 1)

When the second emitting layer of the organic EL device of the exemplaryembodiment contains the second and fourth compounds, a singlet energyS₁(H2) of the second compound and a singlet energy S₁(D4) of the fourthcompound preferably satisfy a relationship of a numerical formula(Numerical Formula 2) below.

S₁(H2)>S₁(D4)  (Numerical Formula 2)

Singlet Energy S₁

A method of measuring a singlet energy S₁ with use of a solution(occasionally referred to as a solution method) is exemplified by amethod below.

A toluene solution of a measurement target compound at a concentrationranging from 10⁻⁵ mol/L to 10⁻⁴ mol/L is prepared and put in a quartzcell. An absorption spectrum (ordinate axis: absorption intensity,abscissa axis: wavelength) of the thus-obtained sample is measured at anormal temperature (300K). A tangent is drawn to the fall of theabsorption spectrum close to the long-wavelength region, and awavelength value λedge (nm) at an intersection of the tangent and theabscissa axis is assigned to a conversion equation (F2) below tocalculate singlet energy.

Conversion Equation (F2):S₁ [eV]=1239.85/λedge

Any device for measuring absorption spectrum is usable. For instance, aspectrophotometer (U3310 manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.) is usable.

The tangent to the fall of the absorption spectrum close to thelong-wavelength region is drawn as follows. While moving on a curve ofthe absorption spectrum from the local maximum value closest to thelong-wavelength region, among the local maximum values of the absorptionspectrum, in a long-wavelength direction, a tangent at each point on thecurve is checked. An inclination of the tangent is decreased andincreased in a repeated manner as the curve fell (i.e., a value of theordinate axis is decreased). A tangent drawn at a point of the localminimum inclination closest to the long-wavelength region (except whenabsorbance is 0.1 or less) is defined as the tangent to the fall of theabsorption spectrum close to the long-wavelength region.

The local maximum absorbance of 0.2 or less is not counted as theabove-mentioned local maximum absorbance closest to the long-wavelengthregion.

Film Thickness of Emitting Layer

A film thickness of each of the first and second emitting layers of theorganic EL device in the exemplary embodiment is preferably in a rangeof 5 nm to 50 nm, more preferably in a range of 7 nm to 50 nm, furtherpreferably in a range of 10 nm to 50 nm. When the film thickness of eachof the first and second emitting layers is nm or more, the first andsecond emitting layers are easily formable and chromaticity is easilyadjustable. When the film thickness of each of the first and secondemitting layers is 50 nm or less, a rise of the drive voltage is easilysuppressible.

Content Ratios of Compounds in Emitting Layer

When the first emitting layer contains the first compound and the fifthcompound, a content ratio of each of the first compound and the fifthcompound in the first emitting layer preferably falls, for instance,within a range below.

The content ratio of the first compound is preferably in a range from 80mass % to 99 mass %, more preferably in a range from 90 mass % to 99mass %, further preferably in a range from 95 mass % to 99 mass %.

The content ratio of the fifth compound is preferably in a range from 1mass % to 10 mass %, more preferably in a range from 1 mass % to 7 mass%, further preferably in a range from 1 mass % to 5 mass %.

An upper limit of the total of the content ratios of the first compoundand the fifth compound in the first emitting layer is 100 mass %.

It is not excluded that the first emitting layer of the exemplaryembodiment further contains a material(s) other than the first and fifthcompounds.

The first emitting layer may include a single type of the first compoundor may include two or more types of the first compound. The firstemitting layer may include a single type of the fifth compound or mayinclude two or more types of the fifth compound.

When the second emitting layer contains the second compound and thefourth compound, the content ratios of the second and fourth compoundsin the second emitting layer are, for instance, preferably determined asfollows.

The content ratio of the second compound is preferably in a range from80 mass % to 99 mass %, more preferably in a range from 90 mass % to 99mass %, further preferably in a range from 95 mass % to 99 mass %.

The content ratio of the fourth compound is preferably in a range from 1mass % to 10 mass %, more preferably in a range from 1 mass % to 7 mass%, further preferably in a range from 1 mass % to 5 mass %.

An upper limit of the total of the respective content ratios of thesecond and fourth compounds in the second emitting layer is 100 mass %.

It should be noted that the second emitting layer of the exemplaryembodiment may further contain material(s) other than the second andfourth compounds.

The second emitting layer may include a single type of the secondcompound or may include two or more types of the second compound. Thesecond emitting layer may include a single type of the fourth compoundor may include two or more types of the fourth compound.

Electron Blocking Layer

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the electronblocking layer and the first emitting layer are in direct contact witheach other.

At least in the organic EL device according to the first aspect of theexemplary embodiment, the third compound is preferably at least onecompound selected from the group consisting of a compound represented bya formula (31X) below and a compound represented by a formula (32)below.

At least in the organic EL device according to the second aspect of theexemplary embodiment, the electron blocking layer includes the thirdcompound, and the third compound is at least one compound selected fromthe group consisting of a compound represented by a formula (31) belowand the compound represented by the formula (32) below. In the organicEL device according to the second aspect, when the third compound isrepresented by the formula (31) and contains two substituted orunsubstituted amino groups, nitrogen atoms of the two substituted orunsubstituted amino groups are linked to each other by a substituted orunsubstituted arylene group having 13 to 50 ring carbon atoms or asubstituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 13 to 50ring atoms. In the organic EL device according to the second aspect,when the compound represented by the formula (31) as the third compoundincludes a 4-dibenzofuran structure in a molecule, the number of the4-dibenzofuran structures is 1.

Third Compound Third Compound Represented by Formula (31X)

The third compound represented by the formula (31X) will be described.

[Formula 275]

In the formula (31X):

-   -   L_(A), L_(B), and L_(C) are each independently a single bond, a        substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 18 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent        heterocyclic group having 5 to 13 ring atoms;    -   A, B, and C are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 30        ring atoms, or a group represented by —S₁(R′₉₀₁)(R′₉₀₂)(R′₉₀₃);    -   R′₉₀₁ to R′₉₀₃ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms;    -   when a plurality of R′₉₀₁ are present, the plurality of R′₉₀₁        are mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R′₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R′₉₀₂        are mutually the same or different; and    -   when a plurality of R′₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R′₉₀₃        are mutually the same or different.

Third Compound Represented by Formula (31)

The third compound represented by the formula (31) will be described.

In the formula (31): L_(A), L_(B), and L_(C) are each independently asingle bond, or a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to18 ring carbon atoms;

-   -   A, B, and C are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 30        ring atoms, or a group represented by —S₁(R′₉₀₁)(R′₉₀₂)(R′₉₀₃);    -   R′₉₀₁ to R′₉₀₃ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms;    -   when a plurality of R′₉₀₁ are present, the plurality of R′₉₀₁        are mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R′₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R′₉₀₂        are mutually the same or different; and    -   when a plurality of R′₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R′₉₀₃        are mutually the same or different; and    -   a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 30        ring atoms as A, B and C is each independently at least one        group selected from the group consisting of groups represented        by a formula (31A), formula (31B), formula (31C), formula (31        D), formula (31E), and formula (31F) below.

In the formulae (31A), (31B), (31C), (31D), (31E), and (31F):

-   -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₃₀₁ to R₃₀₉        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₃₁₀ to R₃₁₄        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₃₂₀ to R₃₂₄        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   R₃₀₁ to R₃₀₉, R₃₁₀, R₃₁₁ to R₃₁₄, R₃₂₀ and R₃₂₁ to R₃₂₄ neither        forming the substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring nor        forming the substituted or unsubstituted fused ring are each        independently a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to        50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a        halogen atom, a nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   p1 is 3; and a plurality of R₃₁₀ are mutually the same or        different;    -   p2 is 3; and a plurality of R₃₂₀ are mutually the same or        different; and    -   * in the formulae (31A), (31B), (31C), (31D), (31E), and (31F)        are each independently bonded to one of L_(A), L_(B), and L_(C).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, in theformula (31), a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5to 30 ring atoms as A, B and C is preferably each independently at leastone group selected from the group consisting of groups represented bythe formulae (31A), (31E), and (31F).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thethird compound is preferably a compound having only one amino group.

For example, in the organic EL device according to the exemplaryembodiment, it is preferable that the third compound is not a compoundhaving two amino groups such as a compound NPD below.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thethird compound is preferably a compound represented by a formula (310)below.

In the formula (310):

-   -   L_(C), A, B and C represent the same as L_(C), A, B and C        defined in the formula (31) or (31X);    -   p3 is 4; and four R₃₃₀ are mutually the same or different;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of four R₃₃₀        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   p4 is 4; and four R₃₄₀ are mutually the same or different;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of four R₃₄₀        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   R₃₃₀ and R₃₄₀ neither forming the substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring nor forming the substituted or unsubstituted        fused ring are each independently a hydrogen atom, a cyano        group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; and    -   R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ represent the same as R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ defined in the        formula (31) or (31X), or R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ defined in the        formula (32) below.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it ispreferable that two of A, B, and C in the formula (31), (31X), or (310)are groups each represented by a formula (31G) below, and the two groupseach represented by the formula (31 G) are mutually the same ordifferent.

In the formula (31 G):

-   -   X₃ is CR₃₁R₃₂, NR₃₃, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom;    -   when X₃ is CR₃₁R₃₂, a combination of R₃₁ and R₃₂ are mutually        bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring,        mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused        ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₃₅₀ to R₃₅₄        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   R₃₃, and R₃₅₀ to R₃₅₄, R₃₁ and R₃₂ neither forming the        substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring nor forming the        substituted or unsubstituted fused ring are each independently a        hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   p5 is 3; and three R₃₅₀ are mutually the same or different;    -   R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ represent the same as R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ defined in the        formula (31) or (31X), or R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ defined in the        formula (32) below; and    -   * in the formula (31 G) is bonded to L_(A), L_(B) or L_(C);        bonded to a benzene ring bonded to A in the formula (310), or        bonded to a benzene ring bonded to B in the formula (310).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thethird compound is preferably a compound represented by a formula (311)or (312) below.

In the formulae (311) and (312):

-   -   L_(A), L_(B), A, and B represent the same as L_(A), L_(B), A and        B defined in the formula (31) or (31X);    -   L_(C1) is a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6        to 12 ring carbon atoms;    -   X₃ is CR₃₁R₃₂, NR₃₃, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom;    -   when X₃ is CR₃₁R₃₂, a combination of R₃₁ and R₃₂ are mutually        bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring,        mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused        ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₃₆₀ to R₃₆₄        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   R₃₃, and R₃₆₀ to R₃₆₄, R₃₁ and R₃₂ neither forming the        substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring nor forming the        substituted or unsubstituted fused ring are each independently a        hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   p6 is 3; and three R₃₆₀ are mutually the same or different; and    -   R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ represent the same as R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ defined in the        formula (31) or (31X), or R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ defined in the        formula (32) below.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thethird compound is preferably a compound represented by a formula (313)or (314) below.

In the formulae (313) and (314):

-   -   A and B are each independently a substituted or unsubstituted        aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 30 ring atoms, or a        group represented by —S₁(R′₉₀₁)(R′₉₀₂)(R′₉₀₃);    -   R′₉₀₁ to R′₉₀₃ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms;    -   when a plurality of R′₉₀₁ are present, the plurality of R′₉₀₁        are mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R′₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R′₉₀₂        are mutually the same or different; and    -   when a plurality of R′₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R′₉₀₃        are mutually the same or different;    -   L_(C1) is a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6        to 12 ring carbon atoms;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₃₇₁ to R₃₇₈        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   R₃₇₁ to R₃₇₈ neither forming the substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring nor forming the substituted or unsubstituted        fused ring are each independently a hydrogen atom, a cyano        group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group        having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; and    -   R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ represent the same as R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ defined in the        formula (31) or (31X), or R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ defined in the formula        below (32).

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, L_(C1) ispreferably a single bond.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thethird compound is preferably a compound represented by a formula (315)or (316) below.

In the formulae (315) and (316):

-   -   L_(A), L_(B), L_(C), A and B represent the same as L_(A), L_(B),        L_(C), A and B defined in the formula (31) or (31X);    -   X₃ is CR₃₁R₃₂, NR₃₃, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom;    -   when X₃ is CR₃₁R₃₂, a combination of R₃₁ and R₃₂ are mutually        bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring,        mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted fused        ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₃₅₁ to R₃₅₈        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   R₃₃, and R₃₅₁ to R₃₅₈, R₃₁ and R₃₂ neither forming the        substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic ring nor forming the        substituted or unsubstituted fused ring are each independently a        hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; and    -   R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ represent the same as R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ defined in the        formula (31) or (31X).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thethird compound is preferably a compound represented by a formula (317)below.

In the formula (317), L_(A), L_(B), A, and B represent the same asL_(A), L_(B), A and B defined in the formula (31) or (31X).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thethird compound is preferably a compound represented by a formula (318)below.

In the formula (318), L_(A), L_(B), A, and B represent the same asL_(A), L_(B), A and B defined in the formula (31) or (31X).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it isalso preferable that L_(A), L_(B), and L_(C) are each independently asingle bond, or a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to12 ring carbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, L_(C) isalso preferably a single bond.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, L_(C) isalso preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenylene group.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, L_(A),L_(B), and L_(C) are also preferably each independently an aromatichydrocarbon ring group represented by a formula (L1) or a formula (L2)below.

In the formulae (L1) and (L2):

-   -   one of two * is bonded to a nitrogen atom shown in the        formula (31) or (31X); and    -   the other of two * is bonded to one of A, B, and C.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, A ispreferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 12 ringcarbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, A ispreferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group, a substituted orunsubstituted biphenyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted naphthylgroup.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, A ispreferably a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, or a naphthyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, B ispreferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 12 ringcarbon atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, B ispreferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group, a substituted orunsubstituted biphenyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted naphthylgroup.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, B ispreferably a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, or a naphthyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, A or Bis preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group, a substitutedor unsubstituted biphenyl group, or a substituted or unsubstitutednaphthyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it ispreferable that A and B are each independently a substituted orunsubstituted phenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted biphenylgroup, or a substituted or unsubstituted naphthyl group.

Third Compound Represented by Formula (32)

The third compound represented by the formula (32) will be described.

In the formula (32):

-   -   A₄₁ and A₄₂ are each independently a substituted or        unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, or a        substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 30        ring atoms;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₄₁₀ to R₄₁₄        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₄₂₀ to R₄₂₄        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   R₄₁₀ to R₄₁₄ and R₄₂₀ to R₄₂₄ neither forming the substituted or        unsubstituted monocyclic ring nor forming the substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring are each independently a hydrogen atom,        a cyano group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having        1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl        group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50        ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃),        a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a halogen atom, a nitro group,        a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   m1 is 3; and three R₄₁₀ are mutually the same or different;    -   m2 is 3; and three R₄₂₀ are mutually the same or different; and    -   L₄₁ and L₄₂ are each independently a single bond, a substituted        or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms,        or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group        having 5 to 30 ring atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thethird compound is preferably a compound represented by a formula (321),(322), or (323) below.

In the formulae (321), (322), and (323):

-   -   A₄₁, A₄₂, L₄₁ and L₄₂ represent the same as A₄₁, A₄₂, L₄₁ and        L₄₂ defined in the formula (32);    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₄₁₁ to R₄₁₈        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₈        are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring, or not mutually bonded;    -   R₄₁₁ to R₄₁₈ and R₄₂₁ to R₄₂₈ neither forming the substituted or        unsubstituted monocyclic ring nor forming the substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring are each independently a hydrogen atom,        a cyano group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having        1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl        group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50        ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃),        a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a halogen atom, a nitro group,        a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; and    -   R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ represent the same as R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ defined in the        formula (32).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, in theformula (32), (321), (322), or (323),

-   -   one of A₄₁ and A₄₂ is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted        aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms; and    -   the other of A₄₁ and A₄₂ is preferably a substituted or        unsubstituted phenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted        biphenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted terphenyl group,        a substituted or unsubstituted naphthyl group, a naphthylphenyl        group, a triphenylenyl group, or a 9,9-biphenylfluorenyl group.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, in theformula (32), (321), (322), or (323):

-   -   one of A₄₁ and A₄₂ is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted        aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms; and    -   the other of A₄₁ and A₄₂ is preferably a substituted or        unsubstituted phenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted        β-biphenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted m-biphenyl        group, a substituted or unsubstituted o-biphenyl group, a        substituted or unsubstituted 3-naphthylphenyl group, a        triphenylenyl group, or a 9,9-biphenylfluorenyl group.

In the third compound represented by the formula (31X), (31), or (32),R₉₀₁, R₉₀₂, R₉₀₃, R₉₀₄, R₉₀₅, R₉₀₆, R₉₀₇, R₈₀₁ and R₈₀₂ are eachindependently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylgroup having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstitutedcycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ringatoms;

-   -   when a plurality of R₉₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₂ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₃ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₄ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₄ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₅ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₅ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₆ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₆ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₉₀₇ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₇ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   when a plurality of R₈₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₂ are        mutually the same or different.

In the third compound, it is preferable that all groups described as“substituted or unsubstituted” groups are “unsubstituted” groups.

Manufacturing Method of Third Compound

The third compound can be manufactured by a known method. Moreover, thethird compound can also be manufactured based on a known method througha known alternative reaction using a known material(s) tailored for thetarget compound.

Specific Examples of Third Compound

Specific examples of the third compound include the following compounds.It should however be noted that the invention is not limited by thespecific examples of the third compound.

An arrangement of the organic EL device according to the exemplaryembodiment will be further described. The description of the referencesigns may be omitted.

Substrate

The substrate is used as a support for the organic EL device. Forinstance, glass, quartz, plastics and the like are usable for thesubstrate. A flexible substrate is also usable. The flexible substrateis a bendable substrate, which is exemplified by a plastic substrate.Examples of the material for the plastic substrate includepolycarbonate, polyarylate, polyethersulfone, polypropylene, polyester,polyvinyl fluoride, polyvinyl chloride, polyimide, and polyethylenenaphthalate. Moreover, an inorganic vapor deposition film is alsousable.

Anode

Metal, an alloy, an electrically conductive compound, a mixture thereof,or the like having a large work function (specifically, 4.0 eV or more)is preferably used as the anode formed on the substrate. Specificexamples of the material include indium oxide-tin oxide (ITO: Indium TinOxide), indium oxide-tin oxide containing silicon or silicon oxide,indium oxide-zinc oxide, indium oxide containing tungsten oxide and zincoxide, and graphene. In addition, gold (Au), platinum (Pt), nickel (Ni),tungsten (W), chrome (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), iron (Fe), cobalt (Co),copper (Cu), palladium (Pd), titanium (Ti), and nitrides of a metalmaterial (e.g., titanium nitride) are usable.

The material is typically formed into a film by a sputtering method. Forinstance, the indium oxide-zinc oxide can be formed by the sputteringmethod using a target in which zinc oxide in a range from 1 mass % to 10mass % is added to indium oxide. Moreover, for instance, the indiumoxide containing tungsten oxide and zinc oxide can be formed by thesputtering method using a target in which tungsten oxide in a range from0.5 mass % to 5 mass % and zinc oxide in a range from 0.1 mass % to 1mass % are added to indium oxide. In addition, the anode may be formedby a vacuum deposition method, a coating method, an inkjet method, aspin coating method or the like.

Among the organic layers formed on the anode, since the hole injectinglayer adjacent to the anode is formed of a composite material into whichholes are easily injectable irrespective of the work function of theanode, a material usable as an electrode material (e.g., metal, analloy, an electroconductive compound, a mixture thereof, and theelements belonging to the group 1 or 2 of the periodic table) is alsousable for the anode.

A material having a small work function such as elements belonging toGroups 1 and 2 in the periodic table of the elements, specifically, analkali metal such as lithium (Li) and cesium (Cs), an alkaline earthmetal such as magnesium (Mg), calcium (Ca) and strontium (Sr), alloys(e.g., MgAg and AILi) including the alkali metal or the alkaline earthmetal, a rare earth metal such as europium (Eu) and ytterbium (Yb),alloys including the rare earth metal are also usable for the anode. Itshould be noted that the vacuum deposition method and the sputteringmethod are usable for forming the anode using the alkali metal, alkalineearth metal and the alloy thereof. Further, when a silver paste is usedfor the anode, the coating method and the inkjet method are usable.

Cathode

It is preferable to use metal, an alloy, an electroconductive compound,a mixture thereof, or the like having, which have a small work function(specifically, 3.8 eV or less) for the cathode. Examples of the materialfor the cathode include elements belonging to Groups 1 and 2 in theperiodic table of the elements, specifically, the alkali metal such aslithium (Li) and cesium (Cs), the alkaline earth metal such as magnesium(Mg), calcium (Ca) and strontium (Sr), alloys (e.g., MgAg and AILi)including the alkali metal or the alkaline earth metal, the rare earthmetal such as europium (Eu) and ytterbium (Yb), and alloys including therare earth metal.

It should be noted that the vacuum deposition method and the sputteringmethod are usable for forming the cathode using the alkali metal,alkaline earth metal and the alloy thereof. Further, when a silver pasteis used for the cathode, the coating method and the inkjet method areusable.

By providing the electron injecting layer, various conductive materialssuch as A1, Ag, ITO, graphene, and indium oxide-tin oxide containingsilicon or silicon oxide may be used for forming the cathode regardlessof the work function. The conductive materials can be formed into a filmusing the sputtering method, inkjet method, spin coating method and thelike.

Hole Injecting Layer

The hole injecting layer is a layer containing a substance exhibiting ahigh hole injectability. Examples of the substance exhibiting a highhole injectability include molybdenum oxide, titanium oxide, vanadiumoxide, rhenium oxide, ruthenium oxide, chrome oxide, zirconium oxide,hafnium oxide, tantalum oxide, silver oxide, tungsten oxide, andmanganese oxide.

In addition, the examples of the highly hole-injectable substanceinclude: an aromatic amine compound, which is a low-molecule organiccompound, such that 4,4′,4″-tris(N,N-diphenylamino)triphenylamine(abbreviation: TDATA),4,4′,4″-tris[N-(3-methylphenyl)-N-phenylamino]triphenylamine(abbreviation: MTDATA),4,4′-bis[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl(abbreviation:DPAB),4,4′-bis(N-{4-[N′-(3-methylphenyl)-N′-phenylamino]phenyl}-N-phenylamino)biphenyl(abbreviation: DNTPD),1,3,5-tris[N-(4-diphenylaminophenyl)-N-phenylamino]benzene(abbreviation: DPA3B),3-[N-(9-phenylcarbazole-3-yl)-N-phenylamino]-9-phenylcarbazole(abbreviation: PCzPCA1),3,6-bis[N-(9-phenylcarbazole-3-yl)-N-phenylamino]-9-phenylcarbazole(abbreviation: PCzPCA2), and3-[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-(9-phenylcarbazole-3-yl)amino]-9-phenylcarbazole(abbreviation: PCzPCN1); anddipyrazino[2,3-f:20,30-h]quinoxaline-2,3,6,7,10,11-hexacarbonitrile(HAT-CN).

In addition, a high polymer compound (e.g., oligomer, dendrimer andpolymer) is usable as the substance exhibiting a high holeinjectability. Examples of the high polymer compound includepoly(N-vinylcarbazole) (abbreviation: PVK), poly(4-vinyltriphenylamine)(abbreviation: PVTPA),poly[N-(4-{N′-[4-(4-diphenylamino)phenyl]phenyl-N′-phenylamino}phenyl)methacrylamido](abbreviation:PTPDMA), and poly[N,N′-bis(4-butylphenyl)-N,N′-bis(phenyl)benzidine](abbreviation: Poly-TPD). Moreover, an acid-added high polymer compoundsuch as poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)/poly(styrene sulfonic acid)(PEDOT/PSS) and polyaniline/poly (styrene sulfonic acid)(PAni/PSS) arealso usable.

Hole Transporting Layer

The hole transporting layer is a layer containing a highlyhole-transporting substance. An aromatic amine compound, carbazolederivative, anthracene derivative and the like are usable for the holetransporting layer. Specific examples of a material for the holetransporting layer include4,4′-bis[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: NPB),N,N′-bis(3-methylphenyl)-N,N′-diphenyl-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4,4′-diamine(abbreviation: TPD), 4-phenyl-4′-(9-phenylfluorene-9-yl)triphenylamine(abbreviation: BAFLP),4,4′-bis[N-(9,9-dimethylfluorene-2-yl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl(abbreviation: DFLDPBi), 4,4′,4″-tris(N,N-diphenylamino)triphenylamine(abbreviation: TDATA),4,4′,4″-tris[N-(3-methylphenyl)-N-phenylamino]triphenylamine(abbreviation: MTDATA), and4,4′-bis[N-(spiro-9,9′-bifluorene-2-yl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl(abbreviation: BSPB). The above-described substances mostly have a holemobility of 10⁻⁶ cm²/(V·s) or more.

For the hole transporting layer, a carbazole derivative such as CBP,9-[4-(N-carbazolyl)]phenyl-10-phenylanthracene (CzPA), and9-phenyl-3-[4-(10-phenyl-9-anthryl)phenyl]-9H-carbazole (PCzPA) and ananthracene derivative such as t-BuDNA, DNA, and DPAnth may be used. Ahigh polymer compound such as poly(N-vinylcarbazole) (abbreviation: PVK)and poly(4-vinyltriphenylamine) (abbreviation: PVTPA) is also usable.

However, in addition to the above substances, any substance exhibiting ahigher hole transportability than an electron transportability may beused. It should be noted that the layer containing the substanceexhibiting a high hole transportability may be not only a single layerbut also a laminate of two or more layers formed of the abovesubstance(s).

Electron Transporting Layer

The electron transporting layer is a layer containing a highlyelectron-transporting substance. For the electron transporting layer, 1)a metal complex such as an aluminum complex, beryllium complex, and zinccomplex, 2) a hetero aromatic compound such as imidazole derivative,benzimidazole derivative, azine derivative, carbazole derivative, andphenanthroline derivative, and 3) a high polymer compound are usable.Specifically, as a low-molecule organic compound, a metal complex suchas Alq, tris(4-methyl-8-quinolinato)aluminum (abbreviation: Almq3),bis(10-hydroxybenzo[h]quinolinato)beryllium (abbreviation: BeBq2), BAIq,Znq, ZnPBO and ZnBTZ is usable. In addition to the metal complex, aheteroaromatic compound such as2-(4-biphenylyl)-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole (abbreviation:PBD), 1,3-bis[5-(ptert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole-2-yl]benzene(abbreviation: OXD-7),3-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-phenyl-5-(4-biphenylyl)-1,2,4-triazole(abbreviation: TAZ),3-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-(4-ethylphenyl)-5-(4-biphenylyl)-1,2,4-triazole(abbreviation: β-EtTAZ), bathophenanthroline (abbreviation: BPhen),bathocuproine (abbreviation: BCP), and4,4′-bis(5-methylbenzoxazole-2-yl)stilbene (abbreviation: BzOs) isusable. In the exemplary embodiment, for instance, a benzimidazolecompound is suitably usable for the electron transporting layer. Theabove-described substances mostly have an electron mobility of 10⁻⁶cm²/(Vs) or more. It should be noted that any substance other than theabove substance may be used for the electron transporting layer as longas the substance exhibits a higher electron transportability than thehole transportability. The electron transporting layer may be providedin the form of a single layer or a laminate of two or more layers of theabove substance(s).

Moreover, a high polymer compound is usable for the electrontransporting layer. For instance,poly[(9,9-dihexylfluorene-2,7-diyl)-co-(pyridine-3,5-diyl)](abbreviation:PF-Py),poly[(9,9-dioctylfluorene-2,7-diyl)-co-(2,2′-bipyridine-6,6′-diyl)](abbreviation: PF-BPy) and the like are usable.

Compound Represented by Formula (5A)

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it ispreferable that the electron transporting layer is disposed between thesecond emitting layer and the cathode and the electron transportinglayer includes a compound represented by a formula (5A) below.

In the formula (5A):

-   -   X₅₁, X₅₂ and X₅₃ are each independently a nitrogen atom or CR₅,    -   at least one of X₅₁, X₅₂, and X₅₃ is a nitrogen atom;    -   R₅ is a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50        ring carbon atoms, a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃),        a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a substituted or unsubstituted        aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having to 50 ring atoms;    -   R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ represent the same as R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ defined in the        formula (1) or (2);    -   Ax is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 18        ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 13 ring atoms;    -   Bx is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 18        ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 13 ring atoms;    -   L₅ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted (n+1)-valent        aromatic hydrocarbon ring group having 6 to 18 ring carbon        atoms; or a substituted or unsubstituted (n+1)-valent        heterocyclic group having 5 to 13 ring atoms;    -   n is 1, 2, or 3, when n is 2 or 3, L₅ is not a single bond;    -   Cx is each independently a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 60 ring atoms; and    -   when a plurality of Cx are present, the plurality of Cx are        mutually the same or different.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it ispreferable that the compound represented by the formula (5A) is acompound represented by a formula (50A) below.

In the formula (50A), Ax, Bx, Cx, L₅ and n represent the same as Ax, Bx,Cx, L₅ and n defined in the formula (5A).

Electron Injecting Layer

The electron injecting layer is a layer containing a highlyelectron-injectable substance. Examples of a material for the electroninjecting layer include an alkali metal, alkaline earth metal and acompound thereof, examples of which include lithium (Li), cesium (Cs),calcium (Ca), lithium fluoride (LiF), cesium fluoride (CsF), calciumfluoride (CaF₂), and lithium oxide (LiOx). In addition, the alkalimetal, alkaline earth metal or the compound thereof may be added to thesubstance exhibiting the electron transportability in use. Specifically,for instance, magnesium (Mg) added to Alq may be used. In this case, theelectrons can be more efficiently injected from the cathode.

Alternatively, the electron injecting layer may be provided by acomposite material in a form of a mixture of the organic compound andthe electron donor. Such a composite material exhibits excellentelectron injectability and electron transportability since electrons aregenerated in the organic compound by the electron donor. In this case,the organic compound is preferably a material excellent in transportingthe generated electrons. Specifically, the above examples (e.g., themetal complex and the hetero aromatic compound) of the substance formingthe electron transporting layer are usable. As the electron donor, anysubstance exhibiting electron donating property to the organic compoundis usable. Specifically, the electron donor is preferably alkali metal,alkaline earth metal and rare earth metal such as lithium, cesium,magnesium, calcium, erbium and ytterbium. The electron donor is alsopreferably alkali metal oxide and alkaline earth metal oxide such aslithium oxide, calcium oxide, and barium oxide. Moreover, a Lewis basesuch as magnesium oxide is usable. Further, the organic compound such astetrathiafulvalene (abbreviation: TTF) is usable.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, asubstituent for the substituted or unsubstituted group is preferably atleast one group selected from the group consisting of an alkyl grouphaving 1 to 18 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 18 ring carbonatoms, and a heterocyclic group having 5 to 18 ring atoms.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, asubstituent for the substituted or unsubstituted group is preferably analkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.

Layer Formation Method

A method for forming each layer of the organic EL device in theexemplary embodiment is subject to no limitation except for the aboveparticular description. However, known methods of dry film-forming suchas vacuum deposition, sputtering, plasma or ion plating and wetfilm-forming such as spin coating, dipping, flow coating or ink-jet areapplicable.

Layer Thickness

The film thickness of the organic layers of the organic EL device in theexemplary embodiment is not limited unless otherwise specified in theabove. In general, since excessively small film thickness is likely tocause defects (e.g. pin holes) and excessively large thickness leads tothe necessity of applying high voltage and consequent reduction inefficiency, the thickness of the organic layer of the organic EL deviceusually preferably ranges from several nanometers to 1 μm.

Emission Wavelength of Organic EL Device

The organic electroluminescence device according to the exemplaryembodiment preferably emits, when being driven, light whose maximum peakwavelength is in a range from 430 nm to 480 nm.

The maximum peak wavelength of the light emitted from the organic ELdevice when being driven is measured as follows. Voltage is applied onthe organic EL devices such that a current density becomes 10 mA/cm²,where spectral radiance spectrum is measured by a spectroradiometerCS-2000 (manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.). A peak wavelength of anemission spectrum, at which the luminous intensity of the resultantspectral radiance spectrum is at the maximum, is measured and defined asa maximum peak wavelength (unit: nm).

According to the exemplary embodiment, the organic electroluminescencedevice that emits light at high luminous efficiency can be provided.

Second Exemplary Embodiment Organic Electroluminescence Device

An arrangement of an organic EL device according to a second exemplaryembodiment will be described below.

An organic EL device according to the second exemplary embodiment is thesame as the organic EL device according to the first exemplaryembodiment except for a difference in the first emitting layer and thesecond emitting layer. Accordingly, in the description of the secondexemplary embodiment, the same components as those in the firstexemplary embodiment are denoted by the same reference signs and namesto simplify or omit an explanation of the components. Moreover, as thedevice arrangement, materials, and compounds unless otherwise specifiedin the second exemplary embodiment, the same device arrangement,materials, and compounds as described in the first exemplary embodimentare usable.

In the second exemplary embodiment, an “organic EL device according tothe exemplary embodiment” at least includes an “organic EL deviceaccording to a third aspect” and an “organic EL device according to afourth aspect” below, and may further include an organic EL deviceaccording to any other aspect.

An organic EL device according to the third aspect of the exemplaryembodiment includes: an anode; a cathode; a first emitting layerdisposed between the anode and the cathode; a second emitting layerdisposed between the first emitting layer and the cathode; and anelectron blocking layer disposed between the first emitting layer andthe anode, in which the first emitting layer and the second emittinglayer are in direct contact with each other; the first emitting layerand the electron blocking layer are in direct contact with each other;the first emitting layer contains a first host material; the secondemitting layer contains a second host material; the first host materialis different from the second host material; the first emitting layer atleast contains a compound that emits light having a maximum peakwavelength of 500 nm or less; the second emitting layer at leastcontains a compound that emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of500 nm or less; the compound that is contained in the first emittinglayer and emits light having the maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm orless and the compound that is contained in the second emitting layer andemits light having the maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less aremutually the same or different; a triplet energy T₁(H1) of the firsthost material and a triplet energy T₁(H2) of the second host materialsatisfy a relationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 1A)below; and the electron blocking layer contains a third compound, and anionization potential Ip(HT) of the third compound satisfies a numericalformula (M1) below.

T ₁(H1)>T ₁(H2)  (Numerical Formula 1A)

Ip(HT)≥5.67 eV  (M1)

An organic EL device according to the fourth aspect of the exemplaryembodiment includes: an anode; a cathode; a first emitting layerdisposed between the anode and the cathode; a second emitting layerdisposed between the first emitting layer and the cathode; and anelectron blocking layer disposed between the first emitting layer andthe anode, in which: the first emitting layer and the second emittinglayer are in direct contact with each other; the first emitting layerand the electron blocking layer are in direct contact with each other;the first emitting layer contains a first host material; the secondemitting layer contains a second host material; the first host materialis different from the second host material; the first emitting layer atleast contains a compound that emits light having a maximum peakwavelength of 500 nm or less; the second emitting layer at leastcontains a compound that emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of500 nm or less; the compound that is contained in the first emittinglayer and emits light having the maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm orless and the compound that is contained in the second emitting layer andemits light having the maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less aremutually the same or different; a triplet energy T₁(H1) of the firsthost material and a triplet energy T₁(H2) of the second host materialsatisfy a relationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 1A)below; the electron blocking layer contains a third compound, and thethird compound is at least one compound selected from the groupconsisting of a compound represented by the formula (31) and a compoundrepresented by the formula (32); when the third compound is representedby the formula (31) and has two substituted or unsubstituted aminogroups, nitrogen atoms of the two substituted or unsubstituted aminogroups are linked to each other by a substituted or unsubstitutedarylene group having 13 to 50 ring carbon atoms or a substituted orunsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 13 to 50 ring atoms;when the compound represented by the formula (31) includes a4-dibenzofuran structure in a molecule, the number of the 4-dibenzofuranstructures is 1.

The third compound contained in the electron blocking layer of theorganic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment is the same asthe third compound described in the first exemplary embodiment.

According to the exemplary embodiment, an organic electroluminescencedevice with enhanced luminous efficiency can be provided.

Conventionally, Triplet-Triplet-Annihilation (sometimes referred to asTTA) is known as a technique for enhancing the luminous efficiency ofthe organic electroluminescence device. TTA is a mechanism in whichtriplet excitons collide with one another to generate singlet excitons.It should be noted that the TTA mechanism is also sometimes referred toas a TTF mechanism as described in Patent Literature 4. TTF is anabbreviation for Triplet-Triplet Fusion.

The TTF phenomenon will be described. Holes injected from an anode andelectrons injected from a cathode are recombined in an emitting layer togenerate excitons. As for the spin state, as is conventionally known,singlet excitons account for 25% and triplet excitons account for 75%.In a conventionally known fluorescent device, light is emitted whensinglet excitons of 25% are relaxed to the ground state. The remainingtriplet excitons of 75% are returned to the ground state withoutemitting light through a thermal deactivation process. Accordingly, thetheoretical limit value of the internal quantum efficiency of aconventional fluorescent device is believed to be 25%.

The behavior of triplet excitons generated within an organic substancehas been theoretically examined. According to S. M. Bachilo et al. (J.Phys. Chem. A, 104, 7711 (2000)), assuming that high-order excitons suchas quintet excitons are quickly returned to triplet excitons, tripletexcitons (hereinafter abbreviated as 3A*) collide with one another withan increase in the density thereof, whereby a reaction shown by thefollowing formula occurs. In the formula, ¹A represents the ground stateand ¹A* represents the lowest singlet excitons.

³ A*+ ³ A*→(4/9)¹ A+(1/9)¹ A*+(13/9)³ A*

In other words, 5³A*→4¹A+1A* is satisfied, and it is expected that,among triplet excitons initially generated, which account for 75%, onefifth thereof (i.e., 20%) is changed to singlet excitons. Accordingly,the amount of singlet excitons which contribute to emission is 40%,which is a value obtained by adding 15% (75%×(1/5)=15%) to 25%, which isthe amount ratio of initially generated singlet excitons. At this time,a ratio of luminous intensity derived from TTF (TTF ratio) relative tothe total luminous intensity is 15/40, i.e., 37.5%. Assuming thatsinglet excitons are generated by collision of initially generatedtriplet excitons accounting for 75% (i.e., one siglet exciton isgenerated from two triplet excitons), a significantly high internalquantum efficiency of 62.5% is obtained, which is a value obtained byadding 37.5% (75%×(1/2)=37.5%) to 25% (the amount ratio of initiallygenerated singlet excitons). At this time, the TTF ratio is37.5/62.5=60%.

In the organic electroluminescence device of the exemplary embodiment,it is considered that triplet excitons generated by recombination ofholes and electrons in the first emitting layer and present on aninterface between the first emitting layer and organic layer(s) indirect contact therewith are not likely to be quenched even under thepresence of excessive carriers on the interface between the firstemitting layer and the organic layer(s). For instance, the presence of arecombination region locally on an interface between the first emittinglayer and a hole transporting layer or an electron blocking layer isconsidered to cause quenching by excessive electrons. Meanwhile, thepresence of a recombination region locally on an interface between thefirst emitting layer and an electron transporting layer or a holeblocking layer is considered to cause quenching by excessive holes.

The organic electroluminescence device of the exemplary embodimentincludes at least two emitting layers (i.e., the first emitting layerand the second emitting layer) which satisfy a predeterminedrelationship. A triplet energy T₁(H1) of the first host material in thefirst emitting layer and a triplet energy T₁(H2) of the second hostmaterial in the second emitting layer satisfy a relationship of thenumerical formula (Numerical Formula 1A).

By including the first emitting layer and the second emitting layer thatsatisfy the numerical formula (Numerical Formula 1A), triplet excitonsgenerated in the first emitting layer can transfer to the secondemitting layer without being quenched by excessive carriers and beprevented from back-transferring from the second emitting layer to thefirst emitting layer. Consequently, the second emitting layer exhibitsthe TTF mechanism to effectively generate singlet excitons, therebyimproving luminous efficiency.

Accordingly, the organic electroluminescence device includes, asdifferent regions, the first emitting layer mainly generating tripletexcitons and the second emitting layer mainly exhibiting the TTFmechanism using triplet excitons having transferred from the firstemitting layer, and a difference in triplet energy is provided by usinga compound having a smaller triplet energy than that of the first hostmaterial in the first emitting layer as the second host material in thesecond emitting layer, thereby improving the luminous efficiency.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the triplet energyT₁(H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy T₁(H2) of thesecond host material preferably satisfy a relationship of a numericalformula (Numerical Formula 5) below.

T ₁(H1)−T ₁(H2)>0.03 eV  (Numerical Formula 5)

Herein, the “host material” refers to, for instance, a material thataccounts for “50 mass % or more of the layer.” Accordingly, forinstance, the first emitting layer contains 50 mass % or more of thefirst host material with respect to a total mass of the first emittinglayer. For instance, the second emitting layer contains 50 mass % ormore of the second host material with respect to a total mass of thesecond emitting layer.

Emission Wavelength of Organic EL Device

The organic electroluminescence device of the exemplary embodimentpreferably emits, when being driven, light whose maximum peak wavelengthis 500 nm or less.

The organic electroluminescence device of the exemplary embodiment morepreferably emits, when being driven, light whose maximum peak wavelengthis in a range from 430 nm to 480 nm.

The maximum peak wavelength of the light emitted from the organic ELdevice when being driven is measured as follows. Voltage is applied onthe organic EL devices such that a current density becomes 10 mA/cm²,where spectral radiance spectrum is measured by a spectroradiometerCS-2000 (manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.). A peak wavelength of anemission spectrum, at which the luminous intensity of the resultantspectral radiance spectrum is at the maximum, is measured and defined asa maximum peak wavelength (unit: nm).

First Emitting Layer

The first emitting layer includes the first host material. The firsthost material is a compound different from the second host materialcontained in the second emitting layer.

The first emitting layer at least contains a compound that emits lighthaving a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less. This “compound thatemits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less” may bethe first host material or a compound different from the first hostmaterial. The compound that emits light having a maximum peak wavelengthof 500 nm or less and is contained in the first emitting layer ispreferably a compound that emits fluorescence having a maximum peakwavelength of 500 nm or less.

In the exemplary embodiment, the compound that emits light having amaximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less is preferably a compound thatemits fluorescence having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, it is preferablethat the first emitting layer further contains a first dopant materialand the first dopant material is a fluorescent compound.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, it is preferablethat the first dopant material is a compound not having an azine ringstructure in a molecule.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the first dopantmaterial is preferably not a boron-containing complex, more preferablynot a complex.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, it is preferablethat the first emitting layer does not contain a metal complex.Moreover, in the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, it isalso preferable that the first emitting layer does not contain aboron-containing complex.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, it is preferablethat the first emitting layer does not contain a phosphorescent material(dopant material).

In addition, it is preferable that the first emitting layer does notcontain a heavy metal complex and a phosphorescent rare earth metalcomplex. Examples of the heavy metal complex herein include iridiumcomplex, osmium complex, and platinum complex.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the first dopantmaterial is the compound that emits light having a maximum peakwavelength of 500 nm or less, more preferably the compound that emitsfluorescence having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less. Ameasurement method of the maximum peak wavelength of a compound is asdescribed above.

In an emission spectrum of the first dopant material, where a peakexhibiting a maximum luminous intensity is defined as a maximum peak anda height of the maximum peak is defined as 1, heights of other peaksappearing in the emission spectrum are preferably less than 0.6. Itshould be noted that the peaks in the emission spectrum are defined aslocal maximal values.

Moreover, in the emission spectrum of the first dopant material, thenumber of peaks is preferably less than three.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the first emittinglayer preferably emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nmor less when the organic EL device is driven.

The maximum peak wavelength of light emitted from the emitting layerwhen the device is driven can be measured by a method described below.

Maximum Peak Wavelength of Light Emitted from Emitting Layer WhenOrganic EL Device is Driven

For a maximum peak wavelength λp₁ of light emitted from the firstemitting layer when the organic EL device is driven, the organic ELdevice is manufactured by using the same material for the first emittinglayer and the second emitting layer, and voltage is applied on theorganic EL device so that a current density becomes mA/cm², wherespectral radiance spectrum is measured by a spectroradiometer CS-2000(manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.). The maximum peak wavelength λp₁(unit: nm) is calculated from the obtained spectral radiance spectrum.

For a maximum peak wavelength λp₂ of light emitted from the secondemitting layer when the organic EL device is driven, the organic ELdevice is manufactured by using the same material for the first emittinglayer and the second emitting layer, and voltage is applied on theorganic EL device so that a current density becomes 10 mA/cm², wherespectral radiance spectrum is measured by a spectroradiometer CS-2000(manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.). The maximum peak wavelength λp₂(unit: nm) is calculated from the obtained spectral radiance spectrum.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the singlet energyS₁(H1) of the first host material and the singlet energy S₁(D1) of thefirst dopant material preferably satisfy a relationship of a numericalformula (Numerical Formula 20) below.

S ₁(H1)>S ₁(D1)  (Numerical Formula 20)

The singlet energy S₁ means an energy difference between the lowestsinglet state and the ground state.

When the first host material and the first dopant material satisfy therelationship of the numerical formula (Numerical Formula 20), singletexcitons generated on the first host material are easily transferredfrom the first host material to the first dopant material, therebycontributing to fluorescence of the first dopant material.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the triplet energyT₁(H1) of the first host material and the triplet energy T₁(D1) of thefirst dopant material preferably satisfy a relationship of a numericalformula (Numerical Formula 2A) below.

T ₁(D1)>T ₁(H1)  (Numerical Formula 2A)

When the first host material and the first dopant material satisfy therelationship of the numerical formula (Numerical Formula 2A), tripletexcitons generated in the first emitting layer is transferred not ontothe the first dopant material having higher triplet energy but onto thefirst host material, thereby being easily transferred to the secondemitting layer.

The organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment preferably satisfies anumerical formula (Numerical Formula 2B) below.

T ₁(D1)>T ₁(H1)>T ₁(H2)  (Numerical Formula 2B)

Triplet Energy T₁

A method of measuring triplet energy Ti is exemplified by a methodbelow.

A measurement target compound is dissolved in EPA (diethyletherisopentane: ethanol=5:5:2 in volume ratio) so as to fall within a rangefrom 10⁻⁵ mol/L to 10⁻⁴ mol/L, and the obtained solution is encapsulatedin a quartz cell to provide a measurement sample. A phosphorescentspectrum (ordinate axis: phosphorescent luminous intensity, abscissaaxis: wavelength) of the measurement sample is measured at a lowtemperature (77K). A tangent is drawn to the rise of the phosphorescentspectrum close to the short-wavelength region. An energy amount iscalculated by a conversion equation (F1) below on a basis of awavelength value λ_(edge) [nm] at an intersection of the tangent and theabscissa axis. The calculated energy amount is defined as triplet energyT₁.

Conversion Equation (F1):T ₁ [eV]=1239.85/λ_(edge)

The tangent to the rise of the phosphorescence spectrum close to theshort-wavelength region is drawn as follows. While moving on a curve ofthe phosphorescence spectrum from the short-wavelength region to thelocal maximum spectral value closest to the short-wavelength regionamong the local maximum spectral values, a tangent is checked at eachpoint on the curve toward the long-wavelength region of thephosphorescence spectrum. An inclination of the tangent is increasedalong the rise of the curve (i.e., a value of the ordinate axis isincreased). A tangent drawn at a point of the local maximum inclination(i.e., a tangent at an inflection point) is defined as the tangent tothe rise of the phosphorescence spectrum close to the short-wavelengthregion.

A local maximum point where a peak intensity is 15% or less of themaximum peak intensity of the spectrum is not counted as theabove-mentioned local maximum peak intensity closest to theshort-wavelength region. The tangent drawn at a point that is closest tothe local maximum peak intensity closest to the short-wavelength regionand where the inclination of the curve is the local maximum the localmaximum is defined as a tangent to the rise of the phosphorescencespectrum close to the short-wavelength region.

For phosphorescence measurement, a spectrophotofluorometer body F-4500(manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation) is usable. Anydevice for phosphorescence measurement is usable. A combination of acooling unit, a low temperature container, an excitation light sourceand a light-receiving unit may be used for phosphorescence measurement.

Singlet Energy S₁

A method of measuring a singlet energy S₁ with use of a solution(occasionally referred to as a solution method) is exemplified by amethod below.

A toluene solution of a measurement target compound at a concentrationranging from 10⁻⁵ mol/L to 10⁻⁴ mol/L is prepared and put in a quartzcell. An absorption spectrum (ordinate axis: absorption intensity,abscissa axis: wavelength) of the thus-obtained sample is measured at anormal temperature (300K). A tangent is drawn to the fall of theabsorption spectrum close to the long-wavelength region, and awavelength value λedge (nm) at an intersection of the tangent and theabscissa axis is assigned to a conversion equation (F2) below tocalculate singlet energy.

Conversion Equation (F2): S ₁ [eV]=1239.85/λ_(edge)

Any device for measuring absorption spectrum is usable. For instance, aspectrophotometer (U3310 manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.) is usable.

The tangent to the fall of the absorption spectrum close to thelong-wavelength region is drawn as follows. While moving on a curve ofthe absorption spectrum from the local maximum value closest to thelong-wavelength region, among the local maximum values of the absorptionspectrum, in a long-wavelength direction, a tangent at each point on thecurve is checked. An inclination of the tangent is decreased andincreased in a repeated manner as the curve fell (i.e., a value of theordinate axis is decreased). A tangent drawn at a point where theinclination of the curve is the local minimum closest to thelong-wavelength region (except when absorbance is 0.1 or less) isdefined as the tangent to the fall of the absorption spectrum close tothe long-wavelength region.

The local maximum absorbance of 0.2 or less is not counted as theabove-mentioned local maximum absorbance closest to the long-wavelengthregion.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, an electronmobility μH1 of the first host material and an electron mobility μH2 ofthe second host material also preferably satisfy a relationship of anumerical formula (Numerical Formula 6) below.

μH2>μH1  (Numerical Formula 6)

When the first host material and the second host material satisfy therelationship of the numerical formula (Numerical Formula 6), arecombination ability of holes and electrons in the first emitting layeris improved.

The electron mobility can be measured according to impedancespectroscopy.

A measurement target layer having a thickness in a range from 100 nm to200 nm is held between the anode and the cathode, and a smallalternating voltage of 100 mV or less is applied thereto while a bias DCvoltage is applied. The value of an alternating current (the absolutevalue and the phase) which flows at this time is measured. Thismeasurement is performed while changing a frequency of the alternatingvoltage, and complex impedance (Z) is calculated from the current valueand the voltage value. A frequency dependency of the imaginary part(ImM) of the modulus M=iωZ (i: imaginary unit, ω: angular frequency) isobtained. The reciprocal number of a frequency ω at which the ImMbecomes the maximum is defined as a response time of electrons carriedin the measurement target layer. The electron mobility is calculated bythe following equation.

Electron Mobility=(Film Thickness of Measurement TargetLayer)²/(Response Time·Voltage)

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the first dopantmaterial is preferably contained at more than 1.1 mass % in the firstemitting layer. Specifically, the first emitting layer preferablycontains the first dopant material at more than 1.1 mass % relative to atotal mass of the first emitting layer, more preferably at 1.2 mass % ormore relative to the total mass of the first emitting layer, furtherpreferably at 1.5 mass % or more relative to the total mass of the firstemitting layer.

The first emitting layer preferably contains the first dopant materialat 10 mass % or less relative to the total mass of the first emittinglayer, more preferably at 7 mass % or less relative to the total mass ofthe first emitting layer, further preferably at 5 mass % or lessrelative to the total mass of the first emitting layer.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the first emittinglayer preferably contains the first compound as the first host materialat 60 mass % or more relative to the total mass of the first emittinglayer, more preferably at 70 mass % or more relative to the total massof the first emitting layer, further preferably at 80 mass % or morerelative to the total mass of the first emitting layer, more furtherpreferably at 90 mass % or more relative to the total mass of the firstemitting layer, still further more preferably at 95 mass % or morerelative to the total mass of the first emitting layer.

The first emitting layer preferably contains the first host material at99 mass % or less relative to the total mass of the first emittinglayer.

It should be noted that when the first emitting layer contains the firsthost material and the first dopant material, an upper limit of the totalof the respective content ratios of the first host material and thefirst dopant material is 100 mass %.

It is not excluded that the first emitting layer according to theexemplary embodiment further contains a material(s) other than the firsthost material and the first dopant material.

The first emitting layer may include a single type of the first hostmaterial or may include two or more types of the first host material.The first emitting layer may include a single type of the first dopantmaterial or may include two or more types of the first dopant material.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, the filmthickness of the first emitting layer is preferably 3 nm or more, morepreferably 5 nm or more. A film thickness of the first emitting layer of3 nm or more is sufficient to cause recombination of holes and electronsin the first emitting layer.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, the filmthickness of the first emitting layer is preferably 15 nm or less, morepreferably 10 nm or less. A film thickness of the first emitting layerof 15 nm or less is sufficiently thin to allow for transfer of tripletexcitons to the second emitting layer.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, the filmthickness of the first emitting layer is more preferably in a range from3 nm to 15 nm.

Second Emitting Layer

The second emitting layer contains the second host material. The secondhost material is a compound different from the first host materialcontained in the first emitting layer.

The second emitting layer at least contains a compound that emits lighthaving a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less. This “compound thatemits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less” may bethe second host material or a compound different from the second hostmaterial. The compound that emits light having a maximum peak wavelengthof 500 nm or less and is contained in the second emitting layer ispreferably a compound that emits fluorescence having a maximum peakwavelength of 500 nm or less.

A measurement method of the maximum peak wavelength of a compound is asdescribed above.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, it is preferablethat the second emitting layer further contains a second dopant materialand the second dopant material is a fluorescent compound.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the second dopantmaterial is preferably a compound that emits light having a maximum peakwavelength of 500 nm or less, more preferably a compound that emitsfluorescence having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the secondemitting layer preferably emits light having a maximum peak wavelengthof 500 nm or less when the organic EL device is driven.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, a halfbandwidth of a maximum peak of the second dopant material is preferablyin a range from 1 nm to 20 nm.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, a Stokesshift of the second dopant material preferably exceeds 7 nm.

When the Stokes shift of the second dopant material exceeds 7 nm, areduction in luminous efficiency due to self-absorption is likely to beinhibited.

The self-absorption is a phenomenon that emitted light is absorbed bythe same compound to reduce luminous efficiency. The self-absorption isnotably observed in a compound having a small Stokes shift (i.e., alarge overlap between an absorption spectrum and a fluorescencespectrum). Accordingly, in order to reduce the self-absorption, it ispreferable to use a compound having a large Stokes shift (i.e., a smalloverlap between the absorption spectrum and the fluorescence spectrum).The Stokes shift can be measured by a method described in Examples.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, a triplet energyT₁(D2) of the second dopant material and the triplet energy T₁(H2) ofthe second host material preferably satisfy a relationship of anumerical formula (Numerical Formula 3) below.

T ₁(D2)>T ₁(H2)  (Numerical Formula 3)

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, when thesecond dopant material and the second host material satisfy therelationship of the numerical formula (Numerical Formula 3), in transferof triplet excitons generated in the first emitting layer to the secondemitting layer, the triplet excitons energy-transfer not to the seconddopant material having higher triplet energy but to molecules of thesecond host material. In addition, triplet excitons generated byrecombination of holes and electrons on the second host material do nottransfer to the second dopant material having higher triplet energy.Triplet excitons generated by recombination on molecules of the seconddopant material quickly energy-transfer to molecules of the second hostmaterial.

Triplet excitons in the second host material do not transfer to thesecond dopant material but efficiently collide with one another on thesecond host material to generate singlet excitons by the TTF phenomenon.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, a singlet energyS₁(H2) of the second host material and a singlet energy S₁(D2) of thesecond dopant material preferably satisfy a relationship of a numericalformula (Numerical Formula 4) below.

S ₁(H2)>S ₁(D2)  (Numerical Formula 4)

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, when thesecond dopant material and the second host material satisfy therelationship of the numerical formula (Numerical formula 4), due to thesinglet energy of the second dopant material being lower than thesinglet energy of the second host material, singlet excitons generatedby the TTF phenomenon energy-transfer from the second host material tothe second dopant material, thereby contributing to fluorescence of thesecond dopant material.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, it is preferablethat the second dopant material is a compound not having an azine ringstructure in a molecule.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the second dopantmaterial is preferably not a boron-containing complex, more preferablynot a complex.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, it is preferablethat the second emitting layer does not contain a metal complex.Further, in the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, it isalso preferable that the second emitting layer does not contain aboron-containing complex.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, it is preferablethat the second emitting layer does not contain a phosphorescentmaterial (dopant material).

Further, it is preferable that the second emitting layer does notcontain a heavy metal complex and a phosphorescent rare earth metalcomplex. Examples of the heavy metal complex herein include iridiumcomplex, osmium complex, and platinum complex.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the second dopantmaterial is preferably contained at more than 1.1 mass % in the secondemitting layer. Specifically, the second emitting layer preferablycontains the second dopant material at more than 1.1 mass % relative toa total mass of the second emitting layer, more preferably at more than1.2 mass % relative to the total mass of the second emitting layer,further preferably at more than 1.5 mass % relative to the total mass ofthe second emitting layer.

The second emitting layer preferably contains the second dopant materialat 10 mass % or less relative to the total mass of the second emittinglayer, more preferably at 7 mass % or less relative to the total mass ofthe second emitting layer, further preferably at 5 mass % or lessrelative to the total mass of the second emitting layer.

The second emitting layer preferably contains the second compound as thesecond host material at 60 mass % or more relative to the total mass ofthe second emitting layer, more preferably at 70 mass % or more relativeto the total mass of the second emitting layer, further preferably at 80mass % or more relative to the total mass of the second emitting layer,more further preferably at 90 mass % or more relative to the total massof the second emitting layer, still further more preferably at 95 mass %or more relative to the total mass of the second emitting layer.

The second emitting layer preferably contains the second host materialat 99 mass % or less relative to the total mass of the second emittinglayer.

It should be noted that when the second emitting layer contains thesecond host material and the second dopant material, an upper limit ofthe total of the respective content ratios of the second host materialand the second dopant material is 100 mass %.

It is not excluded that the second emitting layer according to theexemplary embodiment further contains a material(s) other than thesecond host material and the second dopant material.

The second emitting layer may include a single type of the second hostmaterial or may include two or more types of the second host material.The second emitting layer may include a single type of the second dopantmaterial or may include two or more types of the second dopant material.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, the filmthickness of the second emitting layer is preferably 5 nm or more, morepreferably nm or more. When the film thickness of the second emittinglayer is 5 nm or more, it is easy to inhibit triplet excitons havingtransferred from the first emitting layer to the second emitting layerfrom returning to the first emitting layer. Further, when the filmthickness of the second emitting layer is 5 nm or more, triplet excitonscan be sufficiently separated from the recombination portions in thefirst emitting layer.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, the filmthickness of the second emitting layer is preferably 20 nm or less. Whenthe film thickness of the second emitting layer is 20 nm or less, thedensity of the triplet excitons in the second emitting layer is improvedto cause the TTF phenomenon more easily.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, the filmthickness of the second emitting layer is preferably in a range from 5nm to 20 nm.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, atriplet energy T₁(DX) of the compound that is contained in the firstemitting layer and emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500nm or less or the compound that is contained in the second emittinglayer and emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm orless, the triplet energy T₁(H1) of the first host material, and thetriplet energy T₁(H2) of the second host material preferably satisfy arelationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 10) below.

2.6 eV>T ₁(DX)>T ₁(H1)>T ₁(H2)  (Numerical Formula 10)

When the first emitting layer contains the first dopant material, thetriplet energy T₁(D1) of the first dopant material preferably satisfiesa relationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 10A) below.

2.6 eV>T ₁(D1)>T ₁(H1)>T ₁(H2)  (Numerical Formula 10A)

When the second emitting layer contains the second dopant material, thetriplet energy T₁(D2) of the second dopant material preferably satisfiesa relationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 10B) below.

2.6 eV>T ₁(D2)>T ₁(H1)>T ₁(H2)  (Numerical Formula 10B)

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thetriplet energy T₁(DX) of the compound that is contained in the firstemitting layer and emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500nm or less or the compound that is contained in the second emittinglayer and emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or lessand the triplet energy T₁(H1) of the first host material preferablysatisfy a relationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 11)below.

0 eV<T ₁(DX)−T ₁(H1)<0.6 eV  (Numerical Formula 11)

When the first emitting layer contains the first dopant material, thetriplet energy T₁(D1) of the first dopant material preferably satisfiesa relationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 11A) below.

0 eV<T ₁(D1)−T ₁(H1)<0.6 eV  (Numerical Formula 11A)

When the second emitting layer contains the second dopant material, thetriplet energy T₁(D2) of the second dopant material preferably satisfiesa relationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 11B) below.

0 eV<T ₁(D2)−T ₁(H2)<0.8 eV  (Numerical Formula 11B)

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thetriplet energy T₁(H1) of the first host material preferably satisfies arelationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 12) below.

T ₁(H1)>2.0 eV  (Numerical Formula 12)

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thetriplet energy T₁(H1) of the first host material also preferablysatisfies a relationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 12A),or also preferably satisfies a relationship of a numerical formula(Numerical Formula 12B).

T ₁(H1)>2.10 eV  (Numerical Formula 12A)

T ₁(H1)>2.15 eV  (Numerical Formula 12B)

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, when thetriplet energy T₁(H1) of the first host material satisfies therelationship of the numerical formula (Numerical Formula 12A) or thenumerical formula (Numerical Formula 12B), triplet excitons generated inthe first emitting layer are easily transferred to the second emittinglayer as well as easily inhibited from back-transferring from the secondemitting layer to the first emitting layer. Consequently, singletexcitons are generated efficiently in the second emitting layer, therebyimproving luminous efficiency.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thetriplet energy T₁(H1) of the first host material also preferablysatisfies a relationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 12C),or also preferably satisfies a relationship of a numerical formula(Numerical Formula 12D).

2.08 eV>T ₁(H1)>1.87 eV  (Numerical Formula 12C)

2.05 eV>T ₁(H1)>1.90 eV  (Numerical Formula 12D)

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, when thetriplet energy T₁(H1) of the first host material satisfies therelationship of the numerical formula (Numerical Formula 12C) or thenumerical formula (Numerical Formula 12D), energy of the tripletexcitons generated in the first emitting layer is reduced. This allowsthe organic EL device to have a longer lifetime.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, atriplet energy T₁(F1) of the compound that is contained in the firstemitting layer and emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500nm or less also preferably satisfies a relationship of a numericalformula (Numerical Formula 14A) below, or also preferably satisfies arelationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 14B) below.

2.60 eV>T ₁(F1)  (Numerical Formula 14A)

2.50 eV>T₁(F1)  (Numerical Formula 14B)

The first emitting layer containing the compound that satisfies therelationship of the numerical formula (Numerical Formula 14A) or thenumerical formula (Numerical Formula 14B) results in the organic ELdevice with a longer lifetime.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, atriplet energy T₁(F2) of the compound that is contained in the secondemitting layer and emits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500nm or less also preferably satisfies a relationship of a numericalformula (Numerical Formula 14C) below, or also preferably satisfies arelationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 14D) below.

2.60 eV>T ₁(F2)  (Numerical Formula 14C)

2.50 eV>T ₁(F2)  (Numerical Formula 14D)

The second emitting layer containing the compound that satisfies therelationship of the numerical formula (Numerical Formula 14C) or thenumerical formula (Numerical Formula 14D) results in the organic ELdevice with a longer lifetime.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thetriplet energy T₁(H2) of the second host material preferably satisfies arelationship of a numerical formula (Numerical Formula 13) below.

T ₁(H2)≥1.9 eV  (Numerical Formula 13)

Additional Layers of Organic EL Device

The organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment may includeone or more organic layers in addition to the electron blocking layer,the first emitting layer and the second emitting layer. Examples of theadditional organic layer include at least one layer selected from thegroup consisting of a hole injecting layer, a hole transporting layer,an emitting layer, an electron injecting layer, an electron transportinglayer, and a hole blocking layer.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, theorganic layers may consist of the electron blocking layer, the firstemitting layer, and the second emitting layer, but further include, forinstance, at least one layer selected from the group consisting of thehole injecting layer, the hole transporting layer, the electroninjecting layer, the electron transporting layer, and the hole blockinglayer.

The organic electroluminescence device according to the exemplaryembodiment also preferably includes the anode, the first emitting layer,the second emitting layer, and the cathode in this order.

Hole Transporting Layer

In the organig EL device of the exemplary embodiment, a holetransporting layer is preferably interposed between the anode and theelectron blocking layer.

Electron Transporting Layer

In the organig EL device of the exemplary embodiment, an electrontransporting layer is preferably interposed between the second emittinglayer and the cathode.

Herein, a layer arrangement that the first emitting layer and the secondemitting layer are in direct contact with each other may include one ofembodiments (LS₁), (LS₂) and (LS₃) below.

(LS₁) An embodiment in which a region containing both the first hostmaterial and the second host material is generated in a process ofvapor-depositing the compound of the first emitting layer andvapor-depositing the compound of the second emitting layer, and ispresent on the interface between the first emitting layer and the secondemitting layer.

(LS2) An embodiment in which in a case of containing an emittingcompound in the first emitting layer and the second emitting layer, aregion containing all of the first host material, the second hostmaterial and the emitting compound is generated in a process ofvapor-depositing the compound of the first emitting layer andvapor-depositing the compound of the second emitting layer, and ispresent on the interface between the first emitting layer and the secondemitting layer.

(LS3) An embodiment in which in a case of containing an emittingcompound in the first emitting layer and the second emitting layer, aregion containing the emitting compound, a region containing the firsthost material or a region containing the second host material isgenerated in a process of vapor-depositing the compound of the firstemitting layer and vapor-depositing the compound of the second emittinglayer, and is present on the interface between the first emitting layerand the second emitting layer.

Third Emitting Layer

The organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment may furtherinclude a third emitting layer.

It is preferable that: the third emitting layer contains a third hostmaterial; the first host material, the second host material and thethird host material are different from one another; the third emittinglayer at least contains a compound that emits light having a maximumpeak wavelength of 500 nm or less; the compound that emits light havinga maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less and is contained in thefirst emitting layer, the compound that emits light having a maximumpeak wavelength of 500 nm or less and is contained in the secondemitting layer, and the compound that emits light having a maximum peakwavelength of 500 nm or less and is contained in the third emittinglayer are the same or different; and the triplet energy T₁(H1) of thefirst host material and a triplet energy T₁(H3) of the third hostmaterial satisfy a relationship of a numerical formula (NumericalFormula 30A) below.

T ₁(H1)>T ₁(H3)  (Numerical Formula 30A)

When the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodimentincludes the third emitting layer, the triplet energy T₁(H2) of thesecond host material and the triplet energy T₁(H3) of the third hostmaterial preferably satisfy a relationship of a numerical formula(Numerical Formula 30B) below.

T ₁(H2)>T ₁(H3)  (Numerical Formula 30B)

When the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodimentincludes the third emitting layer, it is preferable that the firstemitting layer and the second emitting layer are in direct contact witheach other and the second emitting layer and the third emitting layerare in direct contact with each other.

Herein, a layer arrangement that the second emitting layer and the thirdemitting layer are in direct contact with each other can include one ofembodiments (LS4), (LS5) and (LS6) below.

(LS4) An embodiment in which a region containing both the second hostmaterial and the third host material is generated in a process ofvapor-depositing the compound of the second emitting layer andvapor-depositing the compound of the third emitting layer, and ispresent on the interface between the second emitting layer and the thirdemitting layer.

(LS5) An embodiment in which in a case of containing an emittingcompound in the second emitting layer and the third emitting layer, aregion containing the second host material, the third host material andthe emitting compound is generated in a process of vapor-depositing thecompound of the second emitting layer and vapor-depositing the compoundof the third emitting layer, and is present on the interface between thesecond emitting layer and the third emitting layer.

(LS6) An embodiment in which in a case of containing an emittingcompound in the second emitting layer and the third emitting layer, aregion containing the emitting compound, a region containing the secondhost material or a region containing the third host material isgenerated in a process of vapor-depositing the compound of the secondemitting layer and vapor-depositing the compound of the third emittinglayer, and is present on the interface between the second emitting layerand the third emitting layer.

Further, it is also preferable that the organic EL device according tothe exemplary embodiment further includes a diffusion layer.

When the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodimentincludes the diffusion layer, the diffusion layer is preferably disposedbetween the first emitting layer and the second emitting layer.

First Host Material, Second Host Material, Third Host Material

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, examplesof the first host material, the second host material, and the third hostmaterial include the first compound represented by the formula (1), aformula (1X), a formula (12X), a formula (13X), a formula (14X), aformula (15X), or a formula (16X) below and the second compoundrepresented by the formula (2). Further, the first compound can be alsoused as the first host material and the second host material. In thiscase, the compound represented by the formula (1), (1X), (12X), (13X),(14X), (15X), or (16X) used as the second host material may be referredto as the second compound for convenience.

First Compound

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, inaddition to the first compound described in the first exemplaryembodiment, the compound represented by the formula (1X), (12X), (13X),(14X), (15X), or (16X) can be also used as the first compound.

Compound Represented by Formula (1X)

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the first compoundis also preferably a compound represented by the formula (1X) below.

In the formula (1X):

-   -   R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₂ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon        atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by        —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group        having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the formula        (11X);    -   at least one of R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₂ is the group represented by the        formula (11X);    -   when a plurality of groups represented by the formula (11X) are        present, the plurality of groups represented by the formula        (11X) are mutually the same or different;    -   L₁₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted arylene        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring        atoms; and    -   Ar₁₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mx is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;    -   when two or more L₁₀₁ are present, the two or more L₁₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more Ar₁₀₁ are present, the two or more Ar₁₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   * in the formula (11X) represents a bonding position to a        benz[a]anthracene ring in the formula (1X).

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the grouprepresented by the formula (11X) is preferably a group represented by aformula (111X) below.

In the formula (111X):

-   -   X₁ is CR₁₄₃R₁₄₄, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NR₁₄₅;    -   L₁₁₁ and L₁₁₂ are each independently a single bond, a        substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   ma is 1, 2, 3, or 4; mb is 1, 2, 3, or 4; ma+mb is 2, 3, or 4;    -   Ar₁₀₁ represents the same as Ar₁₀₁ in the formula (11);    -   R₁₄₁, R₁₄₂, R₁₄₃, R₁₄₄, and R₁₄₅ are each independently a        hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having        1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl        group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3        to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group        represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl        group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, a group represented by        —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a        cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mc is 3; three R₁₄₁ are mutually the same or different; and    -   md is 3; and three R₁₄₂ are mutually the same or different.

Among positions *1 to *8 of carbon atoms in the cyclic structurerepresented by a formula (111aX) below contained in the grouprepresented by the formula (111 X), L₁₁₁ is bonded to one of positions*1 to *4, R₁₄₁ is bonded to each of three positions of the rest of *1 to*4, L₁₁₂ is bonded to one of positions *5 to *8, and R₁₄₂ is bonded toeach of three positions of the rest of *5 to *8.

For instance, in the group represented by the formula (111X), when L₁₁₁is bonded to *2 position of the carbon atom in the cyclic structurerepresented by the formula (111 aX), and when L₁₁₂ is bonded to *7position of the carbon atom in the cyclic structure represented by theformula (111aX), the group represented by the formula (111X) isrepresented by a formula (111 bX) below.

In the formula (111bX):

-   -   X₁, L₁₁₁, L₁₁₂, ma, mb, Ar₁₀₁, R₁₄₁, R₁₄₂, R₁₄₃, R₁₄₄ and R₁₄₅        each independently represent the same as X₁, L₁₁₁, L₁₁₂, ma, mb,        Ar₁₀₁, R₁₄₁, R₁₄₂, R₁₄₃, R₁₄₄ and R₁₄₅ in the formula (111X);    -   a plurality of R₁₄₁ are mutually the same or different; and    -   a plurality of R₁₄₂ are mutually the same or different.

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the grouprepresented by the formula (111X) is preferably a group represented bythe formula (111bX).

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), ma is preferably 1 or2, and mb is preferably 1 or 2.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), ma is preferably 1, andmb is preferably 1.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), Ar₁₀₁ is preferably asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), Ar₁₀₁ is preferably asubstituted or unsubstituted phenyl group, a substituted orunsubstituted naphthyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted biphenylgroup, a substituted or unsubstituted terphenyl group, a substituted orunsubstituted benz[a]anthryl group, a substituted or unsubstitutedpyrenyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted phenanthryl group, or asubstituted or unsubstituted fluorenyl group.

The compound represented by the formula (1X) is also preferablyrepresented by a formula (101X) below.

In the formula (101X):

-   -   one of R₁₁₁ and R₁₁₂ represents a bonding position to L₁₀₁, and        one of R₁₃₃ and R₁₃₄ represents a bonding position to L₁₀₁;    -   R₁₁₁ or R₁₁₂ that is not a bonding position to R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀,        R₁₂₁ to R₁₃₀, and L₁₀₁, and R₁₃₃ or R₁₃₄ that is not a bonding        position to L₁₀₁ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon        atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by        —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   L₁₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted arylene        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring        atoms;    -   mx is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5; and    -   when two or more L₁₀₁ are present, the two or more L₁₀₁ are        mutually the same or different.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), L₁₀₁ is preferably asingle bond, or a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to50 ring carbon atoms.

The compound represented by the formula (1X) is also preferablyrepresented by a formula (102X) below.

In the formula (102X):

-   -   one of R₁₁₁ and R₁₁₂ represents a bonding position to L₁₁₁, and        one of R₁₃₃ and R₁₃₄ represents a bonding position to L₁₁₂;    -   R₁₁₁ or R₁₁₂ that is not a bonding position to R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀,        R₁₂₁ to R₁₃₀, and L₁₁₁, and R₁₃₃ or R₁₃₄ that is not a bonding        position to L₁₁₂ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon        atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by        —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   X₁ is CR₁₄₃R₁₄₄, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or NR₁₄₅;    -   L₁₁₁ and L₁₁₂ are each independently a single bond, a        substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   ma is 1, 2, 3, or 4;    -   mb is 1, 2, 3, or 4;    -   ma+mb is 2, 3, 4, or 5;    -   R₁₄₁, R₁₄₂, R₁₄₃, R₁₄₄ and R₁₄₅ are each independently a        hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having        1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl        group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3        to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by        —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group        represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl        group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms, a group represented by        —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a        cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mc is 3;    -   three R₁₄₁ are mutually the same or different;    -   md is 3; and    -   three R₁₄₂ are mutually the same or different.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), ma in the formula(102X) is preferably 1 or 2, and mb in the formula (102X) is preferably1 or 2.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), ma in the formula(102X) is preferably 1, and mb in the formula (102X) is preferably 1.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), the group representedby the formula (11X) is also preferably a group represented by a formula(11AX) below or a group represented by a formula (11 BX) below.

In the formulae (11AX) and (11BX):

-   -   R₁₂₁ to R₁₃₁ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon        atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by        —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic        group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   when a plurality of groups represented by the formula (11AX) are        present, the plurality of groups represented by the formula        (11AX) are mutually the same or different;    -   when a plurality of groups represented by the formula (11 BX)        are present, the plurality of groups represented by the formula        (11 BX) are mutually the same or different;    -   L₁₃₁ and L₁₃₂ are each independently a single bond, a        substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted divalent        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms; and    -   * in the formulae (11 AX) and (11 BX) each represent a bonding        position to a benz[a]anthracene ring in the formula (1X).

The compound represented by the formula (1X) is also preferablyrepresented by a formula (103X) below.

In the formula (103X):

-   -   R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ and R₁₁₂ respectively represent the same as R₁₀₁ to        R₁₁₀ and R₁₁₂ in the formula (1X); and    -   R₁₂₁ to R₁₃₁, L₁₃₁ and L₁₃₂ respectively represent the same as        R₁₂₁ to R₁₃₁, L₁₃₁ and L₁₃₂ in the formula (11 BX).

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), L₁₃₁ is also preferablya substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), L₁₃₂ is also preferablya substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), two or more of R₁₀₁ toR₁₁₂ are also preferably the group represented by the formula (11).

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), two or more of R₁₀₁ toR₁₁₂ are preferably the groups represented by the formula (11X), andAr₁₀₁ in the formula (11X) is preferably a substituted or unsubstitutedaryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), it is also preferbalethat:

-   -   Ar₁₀₁ is not a substituted or unsubstituted benz[a]anthryl        group;    -   L₁₀₁ is not a substituted or unsubstituted benz[a]anthrylene        group; and    -   a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms as R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ that are not the group represented        by the formula (11X) is not a substituted or unsubstituted        benz[a]anthryl group.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), it is preferable thatR₁₀₁ to R₁₁₂ that are not the group represented by the formula (11X) areeach independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylgroup having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstitutedcycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ringatoms.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₂ that arenot the group represented by the formula (11X) are preferably a hydrogenatom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50ring carbon atoms.

In the compound represented by the formula (1X), R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₂ that arenot the group represented by the formula (11X) are preferably a hydrogenatom.

Compound Represented by Formula (12X)

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thefirst compound is also preferably a compound represented by the formula(12X) below.

In the formula (12X):

-   -   at least one combination of adjacent two or more of R₁₂₀₁ to        R₁₂₁₀ are mutually bonded to form a substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, or mutually bonded to form a substituted or        unsubstituted fused ring;    -   R₁₂₀₁ to R₁₂₁₀ neither forming the substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring nor forming the substituted or unsubstituted        fused ring are each independently a hydrogen atom, a substituted        or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a        substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to 50        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon        atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by        —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group        having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the formula        (121);    -   a substituent for substituting the substituted or unsubstituted        monocyclic ring, a substituent for substituting the substituted        or unsubstituted fused ring, and at least one of R₁₂₀₁ to R₁₂₁₀        are each the group represented by the formula (121);    -   when a plurality of groups represented by the formula (121) are        present, the plurality of group represented by the formula (121)        are mutually the same or different;    -   L₁₂₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted arylene        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring        atoms;    -   Ar₁₂₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mx2 is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;    -   when two or more L₁₂₀₁ are present, the two or more L₁₂₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more Ar₁₂₀₁ are present, the two or more Ar₁₂₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   * in the formula (121) represents a bonding position to a ring        represented by the formula (12X).

In the formula (12X), combinations of adjacent two of R₁₂₀₁ to R₁₂₁₀refer to a combination of R₁₂₀₁ and R₁₂₀₂, a combination of R₁₂₀₂ andR₁₂₀₃, a combination of R₁₂₀₃ and R₁₂₀₄, a combination of R₁₂₀₄ andR₁₂₀₅, a combination of R₁₂₀₅ and R₁₂₀₆, a combination of R₁₂₀₇ andR₁₂₀₈, a combination of R₁₂₀₈ and R₁₂₀₉, and a combination of R₁₂₀₉ andR₁₂₁₀.

Compound Represented by Formula (13X)

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thefirst compound is also preferably a compound represented by a formula(13X) below.

In the formula (13X):

-   -   R₁₃₀₁ to R₁₃₁₀ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon        atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by        —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group        having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the formula        (131), at least one of R₁₃₀₁ to R₁₃₁₀ is the group represented        by the formula (131);    -   when a plurality of groups represented by the formula (131) are        present, the plurality of groups represented by the        formula (131) are mutually the same or different;    -   L₁₃₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted arylene        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring        atoms;    -   Ar₁₃₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mx3 is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;    -   when two or more L₁₃₀₁ are present, the two or more L₁₃₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more Ar₁₃₀₁ are present, the two or more Ar₁₃₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   * in the formula (131) represents a bonding position to a        fluoranthene ring represented by the formula (13X).

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, combinations ofadjacent two or more of R₁₃₀₁ to R₁₃₁₀ that are not the grouprepresented by the formula (131) are not bonded to each other.Combinations of adjacent two of R₁₃₀₁ to R₁₃₁₀ in the formula (13X)refer to a combination of R₁₃₀₁ and R₁₃₀₂, a combination of R₁₃₀₂ andR₁₃₀₃, a combination of R₁₃₀₃ and R₁₃₀₄, a combination of R₁₃₀₄ andR₁₃₀₅, a combination of R₁₃₀₅ and R₁₃₀₆, a combination of R₁₃₀₇ andR₁₃₀₈, a combination of R₁₃₀₈ and R₁₃₀₉, and a combination of R₁₃₀₉ andR₁₃₁₀.

Compound Represented by Formula (14X)

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the first compoundis also preferably a compound represented by a formula (14X) below.

In the formula (14X):

-   -   R₁₄₀₁ to R₁₄₁₀ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon        atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by        —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group        having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the formula        (141);    -   at least one of R₁₄₀₁ to R₁₄₁₀ is the group represented by the        formula (141);    -   when a plurality of groups represented by the formula (141) are        present, the plurality of groups represented by the        formula (141) are mutually the same or different;    -   L₁₄₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted arylene        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring        atoms;    -   Ar₁₄₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mx4 is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;    -   when two or more L₁₄₀₁ are present, the two or more L₁₄₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more Ar₁₄₀₁ are present, the two or more Ar₁₄₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   * in the formula (141) represents a bonding position to a ring        represented by the formula (14X).

Compound Represented by Formula (15X)

In the organic EL device of the exemplary embodiment, the first compoundis also preferably a compound represented by a formula (15X) below.

In the formula (15X):

-   -   R₁₅₀₁ to R₁₅₁₄ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon        atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by        —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms; a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group        having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the formula        (151);    -   at least one of R₁₅₀₁ to R₁₅₁₄ is the group represented by the        formula (151);    -   when a plurality of groups represented by the formula (151) are        present, the plurality of groups represented by the        formula (151) are mutually the same or different;    -   L₁₅₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted arylene        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring        atoms;    -   Ar₁₅₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mx5 is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;    -   when two or more L₁₅₀₁ are present, the two or more L₁₅₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more Ar₁₅₀₁ are present, the two or more Ar₁₅₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   * in the formula (151) represents a bonding position to a ring        represented by the formula (15X).

Compound Represented by Formula (16X)

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thefirst compound is also preferably a compound represented by a formula(16X) below.

In the formula (16X):

-   -   R₁₆₀₁ to R₁₆₁₄ are each independently a hydrogen atom, a        substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon        atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1        to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group        having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted        alkynyl group having 2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or        unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms,        a group represented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group        represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a        substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon        atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by        —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a        substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring        carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group        having 5 to 50 ring atoms, or a group represented by the formula        (161);    -   at least one of R₁₆₀₁ to R₁₆₁₄ is the group represented by the        formula (161); when a plurality of groups represented by the        formula (161) are present, the plurality of groups represented        by the formula (161) are mutually the same or different;    -   L₁₆₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstituted arylene        group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or        unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring        atoms;    -   Ar₁₆₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to        50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted        heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;    -   mx6 is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;    -   when two or more L₁₆₀₁ are present, the two or more L₁₆₀₁ are        mutually the same or different;    -   when two or more Ar₁₆₀₁ are present, the two or more Ar₁₆₀₁ are        mutually the same or different; and    -   * in the formula (161) represents a bonding position to a ring        represented by the formula (16X).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it isalso prefable that the first host material has, in a molecule, a linkingstructure including a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring that arelinked with a single bond, in which the benzene ring and the naphthalenering in the linking structure are each independently fused or not fusedwith a further monocyclic ring or fused ring, and the benzene ring andthe naphthalene ring in the linking structure are further linked to eachother by cross-linking at at least one site other than the single bond.

Since the first host material has the linking structure including suchcross-linking, it can be expected to inhibit the deterioration in thechromaticity of the organic EL device.

The first host material in the above case is only required to have alinking structure as the minimum unit in a molecule, the linkingstructure including a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring linked to eachother with a single bond, the linking structure being as represented bya formula (X₁) or a formula (X₂) below (referred to as abenzene-naphthalene linking structure in some cases). The benzene ringmay be fused with a further monocyclic ring or fused ring, and thenaphthalene ring may be fused with a further monocyclic ring or fusedring. For example, also in a case where the first host material has alinking structure including a naphthalene ring and a naphthalene ringlinked to each other with a single bond (referred to as anaphthalene-naphthalene linking structure in some cases) and being asrepresented by a formula (X₃), a formula (X₄), or a formula (X₅) below,the naphthalene-naphthalene linking structure is regarded as includingthe benzene-naphthalene linking structure since one of the naphthalenerings includes a benzene ring.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, thecross-linking also preferably includes a double bond. Specifically, thefirst host material also preferably has a linking structure in which thebenzene ring and the naphthalene ring are further linked to each otherat any other site than the single bond by a cross-linking structureincluding a double bond.

Assuming that the benzene ring and the naphthalene ring in thebenzene-naphthalene linking structure are further linked to each otherat at least one site other than the single bond by crosslinking, forexample, a linking structure (fused ring) represented by a formula (X11)below is obtained in a case of the formula (X1), and a linking structure(fused ring) represented by a formula (X31) below is obtained in a caseof the formula (X3).

Assuming that the benzene ring and the naphthalene ring in thebenzene-naphthalene linking structure are further linked to each otherat any other site than the single bond by cross-linking including adouble bond, for example, a linking structure (fused ring) representedby a formula (X12) below is obtained in a case of the formula (X1), alinking structure (fused ring) represented by a formula (X21) or formula(X22) below is obtained in a case of the formula (X2), a linkingstructure (fused ring) represented by a formula (X41) below is obtainedin a case of the formula (X4), and a linking structure (fused ring)represented by a formula (X51) below is obtained in a case of theformula (X5).

Assuming that the benzene ring and the naphthalene ring in thebenzene-naphthalene linking structure are further linked to each otherat at least one site other than the single bond by cross-linkingincluding a hetero atom (e.g., an oxygen atom), for example, a linkingstructure (fused ring) represented by a formula (X13) below is obtainedin a case of the formula (X1).

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it isalso preferable that: the first host material has, in a molecule, abiphenyl structure in which a first benzene ring and a second benzenering are linked to each other with a single bond; and the first benzenering and the second benzene ring in the biphenyl structure are furtherlinked to each other by cross-linking at at least one site other thanthe single bond.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it isalso preferable that the first benzene ring and the second benzene ringin the biphenyl structure are further linked to each other by thecross-linking at one site other than the single bond. Since the firsthost material has the biphenyl structure including such cross-linking,it can be expected to inhibit the deterioration in the chromaticity ofthe organic EL device.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it isalso preferable that the cross-linking includes a double bond.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it isalso preferable that the cross-linking includes no double bond.

It is also preferable that the first benzene ring and the second benzenering in the biphenyl structure are further linked to each other by thecross-linking at two sites other than the single bond.

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, it isalso preferable that the first benzene ring and the second benzene ringin the biphenyl structure are further linked to each other by thecross-linking at two sites other than the single bond and thecross-linking includes no double bond. Since the first host material hasthe biphenyl structure including such cross-linking, it can be expectedto inhibit the deterioration in the chromaticity of the organic ELdevice.

For example, assuming that the first benzene ring and the second benzenering in the biphenyl structure represented by a formula (BP1) below arefurther linked to each other by cross-linking at at least one site otherthan the single bond, the biphenyl structure is exemplified by linkingstructures (fused rings) represented by formulae (BP11) to (BP15) below.

The formula (BP11) represents a linking structure in which the firstbenzene ring and the second benzene ring are linked to each other at onesite other than the single bond by cross-linking including no doublebond.

The formula (BP12) represents a linking structure in which the firstbenzene ring and the second benzene ring are linked to each other at onesite other than the single bond by cross-linking including a doublebond.

The formula (BP13) represents a linking structure in which the firstbenzene ring and the second benzene ring are linked to each other at twosites other than the single bond by cross-linking including no doublebond.

The formula (BP14) represents a linking structure in which the firstbenzene ring and the second benzene ring are linked to each other at oneof two sites other than the single bond by cross-linking including nodouble bond while being linked to each other at the other of the twosites other than the single bond by cross-linking including a doublebond.

The formula (BP15) represents a linking structure in which the firstbenzene ring and the second benzene ring are linked to each other at twosites other than the single bond by cross-linking including doublebonds.

In the first compound and the second compound, it is preferable that allgroups described as “substituted or unsubstituted” groups are“unsubstituted” groups.

Manufacturing Method of First Compound

The first compound that is usable in the organic EL device according tothe exemplary embodiment can be manufactured by a known method. Thefirst compound can also be manufactured based on a known method througha known alternative reaction using a known material(s) tailored for thetarget compound.

Specific Examples of First Compound

Specific examples of the first compound usable in the organic EL deviceaccording to the exemplary embodiment include, for example, the specificexamples of the first compound described in the first exemplaryembodiment and the following compounds. It should however be noted thatthe invention is not limited by the specific examples of the firstcompound.

A compound(s) included in the specific examples of the first compoundshown below and falling within a definition range of the compoundrepresented by the formula (1) according to the first exemplaryembodiment is/are also usable in the organic EL device according to thefirst exemplary embodiment.

In the specific examples of the compound herein, D represents adeuterium atom, Me represents a methyl group, and tBu represents atert-butyl group.

Second Compound

The second compound described in the first exemplary embodiment isusable also in the organic EL device according to the second exemplaryembodiment.

R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ that are substituents of an anthracene skeleton in thesecond compound represented by the formula (2) are preferably hydrogenatoms in terms of preventing inhibition of intermolecular interactionand inhibiting decrease in electron mobility. However, R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ maybe a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to50 ring atoms.

Assuming that R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ each are a bulky substituent such as an alkylgroup and a cycloalkyl group, intermolecular interaction may beinhibited to decrease the electron mobility of the second compoundrelative to that of the first host material, so that a relationship ofμH2>μH1 shown by the numerical formula (Numerical Formula 6) may not besatisfied. When the second compound is used in the second emittinglayer, it can be expected that satisfying the relationship of μH2>μH1inhibits a decrease in a recombination ability between holes andelectrons in the first emitting layer and a decrease in a luminousefficiency. It should be noted that substituents, namely, a haloalkylgroup, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, group represented by—Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), group representedby —S—(R₉₀₅), group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), aralkyl group, grouprepresented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, group represented by —COOR₈₀₂, halogen atom,cyano group, and nitro group are likely to be bulky, and an alkyl groupand cycloalkyl group are likely to be further bulky.

In the second compound represented by the formula (2), R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈,which are the substituents on the anthracene skeleton, are eachpreferably not a bulky substituent and preferably not an alkyl group andcycloalkyl group. More preferably, R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ are not an alkyl group,cycloalkyl group, haloalkyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, grouprepresented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄),group represented by —S—(R₉₀₅), group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇),aralkyl group, group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, group represented by—COOR₈₀₂, halogen atom, cyano group, and nitro group.

In the second compound, examples of the substituent for a “substitutedor unsubstituted group” on R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ also preferably do not includethe above-described substituent that is likely to be bulky, especially asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group and a substituted orunsubstituted cycloalkyl group. Since examples of the substituent for a“substituted or unsubstituted” group on R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ do not include asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group and a substituted orunsubstituted cycloalkyl group, inhibition of intermolecular interactionto be caused by presence of a bulky substituent such as an alkyl groupand a cycloalkyl group can be prevented, thereby preventing a decreasein the electron mobility. Moreover, when the second compound describedabove is used in the second emitting layer, a decrease in arecombination ability between holes and electrons in the first emittinglayer and a decrease in the luminous efficiency can be inhibited.

It is more preferable that R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈, which are the substituents onthe anthracene skeleton, are not bulky substituents, and R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ assubstituents are unsubstituted. Assuming that R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈, which arethe substituents on the anthracene skeleton, are not bulky substituentsand substituents are bonded to R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ which are the not-bulkysubstituents, the substituents bonded to R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ are preferably notthe bulky substituents; the substituents bonded to R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ servingas substituents are preferably not an alkyl group and cycloalkyl group,more preferably not an alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, haloalkyl group,alkenyl group, alkynyl group, group represented by—Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), group representedby —S—(R₉₀₅), group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), aralkyl group, grouprepresented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, group represented by —COOR₈₀₂, halogen atom,cyano group, and nitro group.

Method of Manufacturing Second Compound

The second compound usable in the organic EL device according to theexemplary embodiment can be manufactured by a known method. The secondcompound can also be manufactured based on a known method through aknown alternative reaction using a known material(s) tailored for thetarget compound.

Specific Examples of Second Compound

Specific examples of the second compound usable in the organic EL deviceaccording to the exemplary embodiment include the specific examples ofthe second compound described in the first exemplary embodiment. Itshould however be noted that the invention is not limited by thespecific examples of the second compound.

First Dopant Material, Second Dopant Material, and Third Dopant Material

In the organic EL device according to the exemplary embodiment, specificexamples of the first, second, and third dopant materials include thefourth compound, the fifth compound, and the like described in the firstexemplary embodiment.

According to the exemplary embodiment, the organic electroluminescencedevice that emits light at high luminous efficiency can be provided.

Third Exemplary Embodiment Electronic Device

An electronic device according to the exemplary embodiment is installedwith any one of the organic EL devices according to the above exemplaryembodiments. Examples of the electronic device include a display deviceand a light-emitting unit. Examples of the display device include adisplay component (e.g., an organic EL panel module), TV, mobile phone,tablet and personal computer. Examples of the light-emitting unitinclude an illuminator and a vehicle light.

Modification of Exemplary Embodiment(s)

The scope of the invention is not limited by the above-describedexemplary embodiments but includes any modification and improvement aslong as such modification and improvement are compatible with theinvention.

For instance, the emitting layer is not limited to two layers, but maybe provided by laminating three or more of emitting layers. When theorganic EL device has three or more emitting layers, it is only requiredthat at least two of the emitting layers satisfy the conditionsdescribed in the above exemplary embodiments. The rest of the emittinglayers is, for instance, a fluorescent emitting layer or aphosphorescent emitting layer with use of emission caused by electrontransfer from the triplet excited state directly to the ground state, inan exemplary embodiment.

When the organic EL device includes a plurality of emitting layers,these emitting layers may be mutually adjacently provided, or may form aso-called tandem organic EL device, in which a plurality of emittingunits are layered via an intermediate layer.

For instance, a blocking layer is optionally provided adjacent to theemitting layer closer to the cathode. The blocking layer is preferablyprovided in contact with the emitting layer to block at least any ofholes, electrons, and excitons.

For instance, when the blocking layer is provided in contact with thecathode-side of the emitting layer, the blocking layer permits transportof electrons, and blocks holes from reaching a layer provided near thecathode (e.g., the electron transporting layer) beyond the blockinglayer. When the organic EL device includes the electron transportinglayer, the blocking layer is preferably disposed between the emittinglayer and the electron transporting layer.

When the blocking layer is provided in contact with the anode-side ofthe emitting layer, the blocking layer permits transport of holes, butblocks electrons from reaching a layer provided near the anode (e.g.,the hole transporting layer) beyond the blocking layer. When the organicEL device includes the hole transporting layer, the blocking layer isdisposed between the emitting layer and the hole transporting layer.

Alternatively, the blocking layer may be provided adjacent to theemitting layer so that the excitation energy does not leak out from theemitting layer toward neighboring layer(s). The blocking layer blocksexcitons generated in the emitting layer from being transferred to alayer(s) (e.g., the electron transporting layer and the holetransporting layer) closer to the electrode(s) beyond the blockinglayer.

The emitting layer is preferably bonded with the blocking layer.

Specific structure, shape and the like of the components in theinvention may be designed in any manner as long as an object of theinvention can be achieved.

EXAMPLES

The invention will be described in further detail with reference toExample(s). It should be noted that the scope of the invention is by nomeans limited by Examples.

Compounds

Structures of a compound represented by a formula (1) and used formanufacturing organic EL devices according to Examples 1 to 14 and 21are shown below.

A structure of a compound represented by a formula (1X) and used formanufacturing an organic EL device in Example 15 is shown below.

A structure of a compound represented by a formula (12X) and used formanufacturing organic EL devices in Examples 16, 18, and 20 is shownbelow.

A structure of a compound represented by a formula (14X) and used formanufacturing organic EL devices in Examples 17 and 18 is shown below.

A structure of a compound represented by a formula (15X) and used formanufacturing organic EL devices in Examples 19 and 20 is shown below.

Structures of a compound represented by a formula (2) and used formanufacturing organic EL devices in Examples 1 to 21 are shown below.

Structures of a compound represented by a formula (31), (32), or (31X)and used for manufacturing organic EL devices in Examples 1 to 21 areshown below.

A structure of a compound used for manufacturing the organic EL devicesin Comparatives 1 to 5 is shown below.

Structures of other compounds used for manufacturing the organic ELdevices in Examples 1 to 21 and Comparatives 1 to 5 are shown below.

Preparation of Organic EL Device

The organic EL devices were prepared and evaluated as follows.

Example 1

A glass substrate (size: 25 mm×75 mm×1.1 mm thick, manufactured byGeomatec Co., Ltd.) having an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparentelectrode (anode) was ultrasonic-cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for fiveminutes, and then UV-ozone-cleaned for 30 minutes. The film thickness ofthe ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.

The cleaned glass substrate having the transparent electrode line wasattached to a substrate holder of a vacuum deposition apparatus.Initially, a compound HT-B and a compound pdope were co-deposited on asurface provided with the transparent electrode line to cover thetransparent electrode, thereby forming a 5-nm-thick hole injectinglayer. The ratios of the compound HT-B and the compound pdope in thehole injecting layer were 97 mass % and 3 mass %, respectively.

After the formation of the hole injecting layer, the compound HT-B wasvapor-deposited to form an 85-nm-thick hole transporting layer.

After the formation of the hole transporting layer, the compound HT1 wasvapor-deposited to form a 5-nm-thick electron blocking layer.

A compound BH1 (host material) and a compound BD1 (dopant material) wereco-deposited on the electron blocking layer such that the ratio of thecompound BD1 accounted for 2 mass %, thereby forming a 5-nm-thick firstemitting layer.

A compound BH2 (host material) and the compound BD1 (dopant material)were co-deposited on the first emitting layer such that the ratio of thecompound BD1 accounted for 2 mass %, thereby forming a 20-nm-thicksecond emitting layer.

A compound ET1 was vapor-deposited on the second emitting layer to forma 5-nm-thick first electron transporting layer (also referred to as ahole blocking layer (HBL)).

A compound ET2 was vapor-deposited on the first electron transportinglayer to form a 20-nm-thick second electron transporting layer (ET).

LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transporting layer toform a 1-nm-thick electron injecting layer.

Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injecting layer to form an80-nm-thick cathode.

The device arrangement of the organic EL device in Example 1 is roughlyshown as follows.

ITO(130)/HT-B:pdope(5,97%:3%)/HT-B(85)/HT1(5)/BH1:BD1(5,98%:2%)/BH2:BD1(20,98%:2%)/ET1(5)/ET2(20)/LiF(1)/Al(80)

The numerals in parentheses represent film thickness (unit: nm).

The numerals (97%:3%) represented by percentage in the same parenthesesindicate a ratio (mass %) between the compound HT-B and the compoundpdope in the hole injecting layer, and the numerals (98%:2%) representedby percentage in the same parentheses indicate a ratio (mass %) betweenthe host material (compound BH1 or BH2) and the dopant material(compound BD1) in the first emitting layer or the second emitting layer.Simlar notations apply to the description below.

Examples 2 and 3

The organic EL devices in Examples 2 and 3 were manufactured in the samemanner as in Example 1 except that the respective electron blockinglayers were formed by using compounds shown in Table 1 in place of thecompound used for forming the electron blocking layer in Example 1.

Comparative 1

The organic EL device in Comparative 1 was manufactured in the samemanner as in Example 1 except that the electron blocking layer wasformed by using a compound shown in Table 1 in place of the compoundused for forming the electron blocking layer in Example 1.

TABLE 1 Electron Blocking Layer Ip of Compound First Emitting LayerSecond Emitting Layer EQE Compound [eV] Compound Compound [%] Example 1HT1 5.72 BH1 and BD1 BH2 and BD1 11.1 Example 2 HT2 5.82 BH1 and BD1 BH2and BD1 11.7 Example 3 HT3 5.79 BH1 and BD1 BH2 and BD1 11.3 Comparative1 Ref-HT-A 5.66 BH1 and BD1 BH2 and BD1 10.5

Example 4

A glass substrate (size: 25 mm×75 mm×1.1 mm thick, manufactured byGeomatec Co., Ltd.) having an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparentelectrode (anode) was ultrasonic-cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for fiveminutes, and then UV-ozone-cleaned for 30 minutes. The film thickness ofthe ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.

The cleaned glass substrate having the transparent electrode line wasattached to a substrate holder of a vacuum deposition apparatus.Initially, the compound HT-B and the compound pdope were co-deposited ona surface provided with the transparent electrode line to cover thetransparent electrode, thereby forming a 5-nm-thick hole injectinglayer. The ratios of the compound HT-B and the compound pdope in thehole injecting layer were 97 mass % and 3 mass %, respectively.

After the formation of the hole injecting layer, the compound HT-B wasvapor-deposited to form an 80-nm-thick hole transporting layer.

After the formation of the hole transporting layer, the compound HT4 wasvapor-deposited to form a 10-nm-thick electron blocking layer.

A compound BH3 (host material) and the compound BD1 (dopant material)were co-deposited on the electron blocking layer such that the ratio ofthe compound BD1 accounted for 2 mass %, thereby forming a 5-nm-thickfirst emitting layer.

A compound BH4 (host material) and the compound BD1 (dopant material)were co-deposited on the first emitting layer such that the ratio of thecompound BD1 accounted for 2 mass %, thereby forming a 20-nm-thicksecond emitting layer. The compound ET1 was vapor-deposited on thesecond emitting layer to form a 5-nm-thick first electron transportinglayer (also referred to as a hole blocking layer (HBL)).

The compound ET2 was vapor-deposited on the first electron transportinglayer to form a 20-nm-thick second electron transporting layer (ET).

LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transporting layer toform a 1-nm-thick electron injecting layer.

Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injecting layer to form an80-nm-thick cathode.

The device arrangement of the organic EL device in Example 4 is roughlyshown as follows.

ITO(130)/HT-B:pdope(5,97%:3%)/HT-B(80)/HT4(10)/BH3:BD1(5,98%:2%)/BH4:BD1(20,98%:2%)/ET1(5)/ET2(20)/LiF(1)/Al(80)

The numerals in parentheses represent film thickness (unit: nm).

The numerals (97%:3%) represented by percentage in the same parenthesesindicate a ratio (mass %) between the compound HT-B and the compoundpdope in the hole injecting layer, and the numerals (98%:2%) representedby percentage in the same parentheses indicate a ratio (mass %) betweenthe host material (compound BH3 or BH4) and the dopant material(compound BD1) in the first emitting layer or the second emitting layer.Simlar notations apply to the description below.

Examples 5 to 7

The organic EL devices in Examples 5 to 7 were manufactured in the samemanner as in Example 4 except that the respective electron blockinglayers were formed by using compounds shown in Table 2 in place of thecompound used for forming the electron blocking layer in Example 4.

Comparative 2

The organic EL device in Comparative 2 was manufactured in the samemanner as in Example 4 except that the electron blocking layer wasformed by using a compound shown in Table 2 in place of the compoundused for forming the electron blocking layer in Example 4.

TABLE 2 Electron Blocking Layer Ip of Compound First Emitting LayerSecond Emitting Layer EQE Compound [eV] Compound Compound [%] Example 4HT4 5.77 BH3 and BD1 BH4 and BD1 11.5 Example 5 HT5 5.77 BH3 and BD1 BH4and BD1 11.3 Example 6 HT6 5.74 BH3 and BD1 BH4 and BD1 11.6 Example 7HT7 5.72 BH3 and BD1 BH4 and BD1 11.0 Comparative 2 Ref-HT-A 5.66 BH3and BD1 BH4 and BD1 10.6

Example 8

A glass substrate (size: 25 mm×75 mm×1.1 mm thick, manufactured byGeomatec Co., Ltd.) having an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparentelectrode (anode) was ultrasonic-cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for fiveminutes, and then UV-ozone-cleaned for 30 minutes. The film thickness ofthe ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.

The cleaned glass substrate having the transparent electrode line wasattached to a substrate holder of a vacuum deposition apparatus.Initially, the compound HT-B and the compound pdope were co-deposited ona surface provided with the transparent electrode line to cover thetransparent electrode, thereby forming a 5-nm-thick hole injectinglayer. The ratios of the compound HT-B and the compound pdope in thehole injecting layer were 97 mass % and 3 mass %, respectively.

After the formation of the hole injecting layer, the compound HT-B wasvapor-deposited to form an 80-nm-thick hole transporting layer.

After the formation of the hole transporting layer, a compound HT8 wasvapor-deposited to form a 10-nm-thick electron blocking layer.

A compound BH5 (host material) and a compound BD2 (dopant material) wereco-deposited on the electron blocking layer such that the ratio of thecompound BD2 accounted for 2 mass %, thereby forming a 5-nm-thick firstemitting layer.

A compound BH6 (host material) and the compound BD2 (dopant material)were co-deposited on the first emitting layer such that the ratio of thecompound BD2 accounted for 2 mass %, thereby forming a 20-nm-thicksecond emitting layer.

The compound ET1 was vapor-deposited on the second emitting layer toform a 5-nm-thick first electron transporting layer (also referred to asa hole blocking layer (HBL)).

The compound ET2 was vapor-deposited on the first electron transportinglayer to form a 20-nm-thick second electron transporting layer (ET).

LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transporting layer toform a 1-nm-thick electron injecting layer.

Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injecting layer to form an80-nm-thick cathode.

The device arrangement of the organic EL device in Example 8 is roughlyshown as follows.

ITO(130)/HT-B:pdope(5,97%:3%)/HT-B(80)/HT8(10)/BH5:BD2(5,98%:2%)/BH6:BD2(20,98%:2%)/ET1(5)/ET2(20)/LiF(1)/Al(80)

The numerals in parentheses represent film thickness (unit: nm).

The numerals (97%:3%) represented by percentage in the same parenthesesindicate a ratio (mass %) between the compound HT-B and the compoundpdope in the hole injecting layer, and the numerals (98%:2%) representedby percentage in the same parentheses indicate a ratio (mass %) betweenthe host material (compound BH5 or BH6) and the dopant material(compound BD2) in the first emitting layer or the second emitting layer.Simlar notations apply to the description below.

Examples 9 to 11

The organic EL devices in Examples 9 to 11 were manufactured in the samemanner as in Example 8 except that the respective electron blockinglayers were formed by using compounds shown in Table 3 in place of thecompound used for forming the electron blocking layer in Example 8.

Comparative 3

The organic EL device in Comparative 3 was manufactured in the samemanner as in Example 8 except that the electron blocking layer wasformed by using a compound shown in Table 3 in place of the compoundused for forming the electron blocking layer in Example 8.

TABLE 3 Electron Blocking Layer Ip of Compound First Emitting LayerSecond Emitting Layer EQE Compound [eV] Compound Compound [%] Example 8 HT8  5.78 BH5 and BD2 BH6 and BD2 11.5 Example 9  HT9  5.70 BH5 and BD2BH6 and BD2 11.5 Example 10 HT10 5.70 BH5 and BD2 BH6 and BD2 11.1Example 11 HT11 5.74 BH5 and BD2 BH6 and BD2 11.0 Comparative 3 Ref-HT-A5.66 BH5 and BD2 BH6 and BD2 10.0

Example 12

A glass substrate (size: 25 mm×75 mm×1.1 mm thick, manufactured byGeomatec Co., Ltd.) having an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparentelectrode (anode) was ultrasonic-cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for fiveminutes, and then UV-ozone-cleaned for 30 minutes. The film thickness ofthe ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.

The cleaned glass substrate having the transparent electrode line wasattached to a substrate holder of a vacuum deposition apparatus.Initially, the compound HT-B and thte compound pdope were co-depositedon a surface provided with the transparent electrode line to cover thetransparent electrode, thereby forming a 5-nm-thick hole injectinglayer. The ratios of the compound HT-B and the compound pdope in thehole injecting layer were 97 mass % and 3 mass %, respectively.

After the formation of the hole injecting layer, the compound HT-B wasvapor-deposited to form an 85-nm-thick hole transporting layer.

After the formation of the hole transporting layer, a compound HT12 wasvapor-deposited to form a 5-nm-thick electron blocking layer.

A compound BH7 (host material) and the compound BD2 (dopant material)were co-deposited on the electron blocking layer such that the ratio ofthe compound BD2 accounted for 2 mass %, thereby forming a 5-nm-thickfirst emitting layer.

A compound BH8 (host material) and the compound BD2 (dopant material)were co-deposited on the first emitting layer such that the ratio of thecompound BD2 accounted for 2 mass %, thereby forming a 20-nm-thicksecond emitting layer.

The compound ET1 was vapor-deposited on the second emitting layer toform a 5-nm-thick first electron transporting layer (also referred to asa hole blocking layer (HBL)).

The compound ET2 was vapor-deposited on the first electron transportinglayer to form a 20-nm-thick second electron transporting layer (ET).

LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transporting layer toform a 1-nm-thick electron injecting layer.

Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injecting layer to form an80-nm-thick cathode.

The device arrangement of the organic EL device in Example 12 is roughlyshown as follows.

ITO(130)/HT-B:pdope(5,97%:3%)/HT-B(85)/HT12(5)/BH7:BD2(5,98%:2%)/BH8:BD2(20,98%:2%)/ET1(5)/ET2(20)/LiF(1)/Al(80)

The numerals in parentheses represent film thickness (unit: nm).

The numerals (97%:3%) represented by percentage in the same parenthesesindicate a ratio (mass %) between the compound HT-B and the compoundpdope in the hole injecting layer, and the numerals (98%:2%) representedby percentage in the same parentheses indicate a ratio (mass %) betweenthe host material (compound BH7 or BH8) and the dopant material(compound BD2) in the first emitting layer or the second emitting layer.Simlar notations apply to the description below.

Examples 13 to 14

The organic EL devices in Examples 13 to 14 were manufactured in thesame manner as in Example 12 except that the respective electronblocking layers were formed by using compounds shown in Table 4 in placeof the compound used for forming the electron blocking layer in Example12.

Comparative 4

The organic EL device in Comparative 4 was manufactured in the samemanner as in Example 12 except that the electron blocking layer wasformed by using a compound shown in Table 4 in place of the compoundused for forming the electron blocking layer in Example 12.

TABLE 4 Electron Blocking Layer Ip of Compound First Emitting LayerSecond Emitting Layer EQE Compound [eV] Compound Compound [%] Example 12HT12 5.83 BH7 and BD2 BH8 and BD2 11.5 Example 13 HT13 5.74 BH7 and BD2BH8 and BD2 11.2 Example 14 HT14 5.97 BH7 and BD2 BH8 and BD2 11.7Comparative 4 Ref-HT-A 5.66 BH7 and BD2 BH8 and BD2 10.1

Example 15

A glass substrate (size: 25 mm×75 mm×1.1 mm thick, manufactured byGeomatec Co., Ltd.) having an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparentelectrode (anode) was ultrasonic-cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for fiveminutes, and then UV-ozone-cleaned for 30 minutes. The film thickness ofthe ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.

The cleaned glass substrate having the transparent electrode line wasattached to a substrate holder of a vacuum deposition apparatus.Initially, a compound HT-C and the compound pdope were co-deposited on asurface provided with the transparent electrode line to cover thetransparent electrode, thereby forming a 10-nm-thick hole injectinglayer. The ratios of the compound HT-C and the compound pdope in thehole injecting layer were 90 mass % and 10 mass %, respectively.

After the formation of the hole injecting layer, the compound HT-C wasvapor-deposited to form an 80-nm-thick hole transporting layer.

After the formation of the hole transporting layer, a compound HT2 wasvapor-deposited to form a 10-nm-thick electron blocking layer.

A compound BH1-1 (host material) and the compound BD2 (dopant material)were co-deposited on the electron blocking layer such that the ratio ofthe compound BD2 accounted for 2 mass %, thereby forming a 5-nm-thickfirst emitting layer.

The compound BH4 (host material) and the compound BD2 (dopant material)were co-deposited on the first emitting layer such that the ratio of thecompound BD2 accounted for 2 mass %, thereby forming a 20-nm-thicksecond emitting layer.

A compound ET3 was vapor-deposited on the second emitting layer to forman 8-nm-thick hole blocking layer (also referred to as a first electrontransporting layer (HBL)).

The compound ET2 was vapor-deposited on the first electron transportinglayer to form a 22-nm-thick second electron transporting layer (ET).

LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transporting layer toform a 1-nm-thick electron injecting layer.

Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injecting layer to form an80-nm-thick cathode.

The device arrangement of the organic EL device in Example 15 is roughlyshown as follows.

ITO(130)/HT-C:pdope(10,90%:10%)/HT-C(80)/HT2(10)/BH1-1:BD2(5,98%:2%)/BH4:BD2(20,98%:2%)/ET3(8)/ET2(22)/LiF(1)/Al(80)

The numerals in parentheses represent film thickness (unit: nm).

The numerals (90%:10%) represented by percentage in the same parenthesesindicate a ratio (mass %) between the compound HT-C and the compoundpdope in the hole injecting layer, and the numerals (98%:2%) representedby percentage in the same parentheses indicate a ratio (mass %) betweenthe host material (compound BH1-1 or BH4) and the dopant material(compound BD2) in the first emitting layer or the second emitting layer.Simlar notations apply to the description below.

Examples 16 to 20

The organic EL devices in Examples 16 to 20 were manufactured in thesame manner as in Example 15 except that the compounds used for formingthe electron blocking layer, the first emitting layer, the secondemitting layer, and the hole blocking layer were changed to those shownin Table 5.

Comparative 5

The organic EL device in Comparative 5 was manufactured in the samemanner as in Example 18 except that the compound used for forming theelectron blocking layer was changed to a compound shown in Table 5.

TABLE 5 Electron Blocking Layer Hole Ip of First Emitting SecondEmitting Blocking Compound Layer Layer Layer EQE LT90 Compound [eV]Compound Compound Compound [%] [hr] Example 15 HT2 5.82 BH1-1 and BD2BH4 and BD2 ET3 9.8 150 Example 16 HT3 5.79 BH1-2 and BD2 BH4 and BD2ET4 9.7 180 Example 17 HT4 5.77 BH1-3 and BD2 BH4 and BD2 ET5 10.3 100Example 18 HT1 5.72 BH1-3 and BD2 BH1-2 and BD2 ET6 9.5 220 Example 19HT12 5.83 BH1-4 and BD2 BH4 and BD2 ET7 10.3 90 Example 20 HT9 5.70BH1-4 and BD2 BH1-2 and BD2 ET8 10.1 95 Comparative 5 Ref-HT-A 5.66BH1-3 and BD2 BH1-2 and BD2 E16 8.8 230

Example 21

A glass substrate (size: 25 mm×75 mm×1.1 mm thick, manufactured byGeomatec Co., Ltd.) having an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) transparentelectrode (anode) was ultrasonic-cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for fiveminutes, and then UV-ozone-cleaned for 30 minutes. The film thickness ofthe ITO transparent electrode was 130 nm.

The cleaned glass substrate having the transparent electrode line wasattached to a substrate holder of a vacuum deposition apparatus.Initially, a compound HT15 and the compound pdope were co-deposited on asurface provided with the transparent electrode line to cover thetransparent electrode, thereby forming a 10-nm-thick hole injectinglayer. The ratios of the compound HT15 and the compound pdope in thehole injecting layer were 90 mass % and 10 mass %, respectively.

After the formation of the hole injecting layer, the compound HT15 wasvapor-deposited to form an 85-nm-thick hole transporting layer.

After the formation of the hole transporting layer, a compound HT9 wasvapor-deposited to form a 5-nm-thick electron blocking layer.

A compound BH1-5 (host material) and a compound BD3 (dopant material)were co-deposited on the electron blocking layer such that the ratio ofthe compound BD3 accounted for 2 mass %, thereby forming a 5-nm-thickfirst emitting layer.

A compound BH2-1 (host material) and the compound BD3 (dopant material)were co-deposited on the first emitting layer such that the ratio of thecompound BD3 accounted for 2 mass %, thereby forming a 15-nm-thicksecond emitting layer.

A compound ET4 was vapor-deposited on the second emitting layer to forma 5-nm-thick hole blocking layer (also referred to as a first electrontransporting layer (HBL)).

A compound ET9 and a compound Liq were co-deposited on the hole blockinglayer (HBL) to form a 25-nm-thick second electron transporting layer(ET). The ratios of the compound ET9 and the compound Liq in the secondelectron transporting layer (ET) were 50 mass % and 50 mass %,respectively.

LiF was vapor-deposited on the second electron transporting layer (ET)to form a 1-nm-thick electron injecting layer.

Metal Al was vapor-deposited on the electron injecting layer to form an80-nm-thick cathode.

The device arrangement of the organic EL device in Example 21 is roughlyshown as follows.

ITO(130)/HT15:pdope(10,90%:10%)/HT15(85)/HT9(5)/BH1-5:BD3(5,98%:2%)/BH2-1:BD3(15,98%:2%)/ET4(5)/ET9:Liq(25,50%:50%)/LiF(1)/Al(80)

The numerals in parentheses represent film thickness (unit: nm).

The numerals (90%:10%) represented by percentage in the same parenthesesindicate a ratio (mass %) between the compound HT15 and the compoundpdope in the hole injecting layer, the numerals (98%:2%) represented bypercentage in the same parentheses indicate a ratio (mass %) between thehost material (compound BH1-5 or BH2-1) and the dopant material(compound BD3) in the first emitting layer or the second emitting layer,and the numerals (50%:50%) represented by percentage in the sameparentheses indicate a ratio (mass %) between the compound ET9 and thecompound Liq in the electron transporting layer (ET). Similar notationsapply to the description below.

TABLE 6 Electron Blocking Layer Hole Ip of First Emitting SecondEmitting Blocking Compound Layer Layer Layer EQE LT90 Compound [eV]Compound Compound Compound [%] [hr] Example 21 HT9 5.70 BH1-5 and BD3BH2-1 and BD3 E14 10.9 106

Evaluation of Organic EL Devices

The organic EL devices manufactured in Examples 1 to 21 and Comparatives1 to 5 were evaluated as follows. Evaluation results are shown in Tables1 to 6.

External Quantum Efficiency EQE

Voltage was applied on the organic EL devices such that a currentdensity was 10 mA/cm², where spectral radiance spectrum was measured bya spectroradiometer (CS-2000 manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.). Theexternal quantum efficiency EQE (unit: %) was calculated based on theobtained spectral-radiance spectra, assuming that the spectra wasprovided under a Lambertian radiation.

Lifetime LT90

Voltage was applied on the resultant organic EL devices such that acurrent density was 50 mA/cm², where a time (LT90 (unit: hr)) elapsedbefore a luminance intensity was reduced to 90% of the initial luminanceintensity was measured.

As shown in Tables 1 to 6, the organic EL devices according to Examples1 to 21, in which the electron blocking layer containing the thirdcompound was disposed close to the anode with respect to the firstemitting layer, emitted light at a high luminous efficiency.

Evaluation of Compounds Ionization Potential Ip

The ionization potential of the compound was measured under atmosphereusing a photoelectron spectroscope (“AC-3” manufactured by RIKEN KEIKICo., Ltd.). Specifically, the material was irradiated with light and theamount of electrons generated by charge separation was measured tomeasure the ionization potential of the compound. Measurement resultsare shown in Tables 1 to 6. Ip in Tables is an abbreviation for theionization potential. The ionization potential of the compound HT-B was5.61 eV. The ionization potential of the compound HT-C was 5.69 eV.

Preparation of Toluene Solution

The compound BD1 was dissolved in toluene at a concentration of 4.9×10⁻⁶mol/L to prepare a toluene solution of the compound BD1.

A toluene solution of the compound BD2 was prepared in the same manneras the compound BD1.

A toluene solution of the compound BD3 was prepared in the same manneras the compound BD1.

Measurement of Maximum Fluorescence Peak Wavelength (FL-Peak)

A maximum fluorescence peak wavelength of the toluene solution of thecompound BD1, the toluene solution of the compound BD2, or the toluenesolution of the compound BD3 excited at 390 nm was measured using afluorescence spectrometer (spectrophotofluorometer F-7000 (manufacturedby Hitachi High-Tech Science Corporation).

The maximum fluorescence peak wavelength of the compound BD1 was 453 nm.

The maximum fluorescence peak wavelength of the compound BD2 was 455 nm.

The maximum fluorescence peak wavelength of the compound BD3 was 444 nm.

Triplet Energy T₁

The measurement target compound was dissolved in EPA (diethyletherisopentane: ethanol=5:5:2 in volume ratio) at a concentration of 10μmol/L, and the obtained solution was encapsulated in a quartz cell toprovide a measurement sample. A phosphorescent spectrum (ordinate axis:phosphorescent luminous intensity, abscissa axis: wavelength) of thesample was measured at a low temperature (77K). A tangent was drawn tothe rise of the phosphorescent spectrum close to the short-wavelengthregion. An energy amount was calculated by a conversion equation (F1)below based on a wavelength value λ_(edge) [nm] at an intersection ofthe tangent and the abscissa axis and was defined as a triplet energyT₁.

Conversion Equation (F1):T ₁[eV]=1239.85/λ_(edge)

The tangent to the rise of the phosphorescence spectrum close to theshort-wavelength region is drawn as follows. While moving on a curve ofthe phosphorescence spectrum from the short-wavelength region to thelocal maximum value closest to the short-wavelength region among thelocal maximum values of the phosphorescence spectrum, a tangent ischecked at each point on the curve toward the long-wavelength of thephosphorescence spectrum. An inclination of the tangent is increasedalong the rise of the curve (i.e., a value of the ordinate axis isincreased). A tangent drawn at a point of the local maximum inclination(i.e., a tangent at an inflection point) is defined as the tangent tothe rise of the phosphorescence spectrum close to the short-wavelengthregion.

The local maximum point where a peak intensity is 15% or less of themaximum peak intensity of the spectrum is not counted as theabove-mentioned local maximum intensity closest to the short-wavelengthregion. The tangent drawn at a point that is closest to the localmaximum intensity closest to the short-wavelength region and where theinclination of the curve is the local maximum is defined as a tangent tothe rise of the phosphorescence spectrum close to the short-wavelengthregion.

For phosphorescence measurement, a spectrophotofluorometer body F-4500(manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation) was used.

Singlet Energy S₁

A toluene solution in which a measurement target compound was dissolvedat a concentration of 10 μmol/L was prepared and was encapsulated in aquartz cell to provide a measurement sample. Absorption spectrum(ordinate axis: absorption intensity, abscissa axis: wavelength) of thesample was measured at the normal temperature (300K). A tangent wasdrawn to the fall of the absorption spectrum close to thelong-wavelength region, and a wavelength value λ_(edge) (nm) at anintersection of the tangent and the abscissa axis was assigned to aconversion equation (F2) below to calculate the singlet energy.

Conversion Equation (F2): S ₁[eV]=1239.85/λ_(edge)

A spectrophotometer (U3310 manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.) was used formeasuring absorption spectrum.

The tangent to the fall of the absorption spectrum close to thelong-wavelength region is drawn as follows. While moving on a curve ofthe absorption spectrum from the local maximum value closest to thelong-wavelength resion, among the local maximum values of the absorptionspectrum, in a long-wavelength direction, a tangent at each point on thecurve is checked. An inclination of the tangent is decreased andincreased in a repeated manner as the curve falls (i.e., a value of theordinate axis is decreased). A tangent drawn at a point where theinclination of the curve is the local minimum closest to thelong-wavelength region (except when absorbance is 0.1 or less) isdefined as the tangent to the fall of the absorption spectrum close tothe long-wavelength region.

The local maximum absorbance of 0.2 or less is not couted as theabove-mentioned local maximum absorbance close to the long-wavelengthregion.

The singlet Energy S₁ and the triplet energy Ti of each compound areshown in Table 7.

TABLE 7 S₁ [eV] T₁ [eV] BH1 3.12 2.10 BH2 2.97 1.80 BH3 3.19 2.08 BH43.01 1.87 BH5 3.19 2.08 BH6 3.04 1.86 BH7 3.11 2.09 BH8 2.98 1.87 BH1-13.11 2.11 BH1-2 2.95 2.20 BH1-3 3.22 2.27 BH1-4 3.31 2.35 BH1-5 3.312.09 BH2-1 3.01 1.82 BD1 2.73 2.29 BD2 2.71 2.60 BD3 2.78 2.32

What is claimed is:
 1. An organic electroluminescence device comprising:an anode; a cathode; a first emitting layer and a second emitting layerdisposed between the anode and the cathode; and an electron transportinglayer disposed between the cathode and the first and second emittinglayers, wherein the electron transporting layer comprises a compoundrepresented by a formula (5A) below, the first emitting layer comprisesa first host material, the second emitting layer comprises a second hostmaterial, the first host material is different from the second hostmaterial, the first emitting layer at least comprises a compound thatemits light having a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less, thesecond emitting layer at least comprises a compound that emits lighthaving a maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less, the compound thatemits light having the maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less and iscontained in the first emitting layer and the compound that emits lighthaving the maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less and is contained inthe second emitting layer are mutually the same or different, a tripletenergy T₁(H1) of the first host material and a triplet energy T₁(H2) ofthe second host material satisfy a relationship of a numerical formula(Numerical Formula 1A) below,

where, in the formula (5A): X₅₁, X₅₂ and X₅₃ are each independently anitrogen atom or CR₅; at least one of X₅₁, X₅₂, and X₅₃ is a nitrogenatom; R₅ is a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a grouprepresented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄),a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having to 50ring atoms; R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ are each independently a hydrogen atom, asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, asubstituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ringcarbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 50 ring atoms; when a plurality of R₉₀₁ are present, theplurality of R₉₀₁ are mutually the same or different; when a pluralityof R₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₂ are mutually the same ordifferent; when a plurality of R₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₃are mutually the same or different; and when a plurality of R₉₀₄ arepresent, the plurality of R₉₀₄ are mutually the same or different; Ax isa substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 18 ring carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to13 ring atoms; Bx is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6to 18 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclicgroup having 5 to 13 ring atoms; L₅ is a single bond, a substituted orunsubstituted (n+1)-valent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group having 6 to18 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted (n+1)-valentheterocyclic group having 5 to 13 ring atoms; n is 1, 2, or 3, when n is2 or 3, L₅ is not a single bond; Cx is each independently a substitutedor unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 60 ringatoms; and when a plurality of Cx are present, the plurality of Cx aremutually the same or different.
 2. The organic electroluminescencedevice according to claim 1, wherein the first emitting layer and thesecond emitting layer are in direct contact with each other.
 3. Theorganic electroluminescence device according to claim 1, wherein thesecond emitting layer is disposed between the first emitting layer andthe cathode.
 4. The organic electroluminescence device according toclaim 1, wherein the first host material comprises, in a molecule, alinking structure comprising a benzene ring and a naphthalene ringlinked to each other with a single bond, the benzene ring and thenaphthalene ring in the linking structure are each independently fusedor not fused with a further monocyclic ring or fused ring, and thebenzene ring and the naphthalene ring in the linking structure arefurther linked to each other by cross-linking at at least one site otherthan the single bond.
 5. The organic electroluminescence deviceaccording to claim 4, wherein the cross-linking comprises a double bond.6. The organic electroluminescence device according to claim 1, whereinthe first host material comprises, in a molecule, a biphenyl structurein which a first benzene ring and a second benzene ring are linked toeach other with a single bond, and the first benzene ring and the secondbenzene ring in the biphenyl structure are further linked to each otherby cross-linking at at least one site other than the single bond.
 7. Theorganic electroluminescence device according to claim 6, wherein thefirst benzene ring and the second benzene ring in the biphenyl structureare further linked to each other by the cross-linking at at least onesite other than the single bond.
 8. The organic electroluminescencedevice according to claim 6, wherein the cross-linking comprises adouble bond.
 9. The organic electroluminescence device according toclaim 6, wherein the first benzene ring and the second benzene ring inthe biphenyl structure are further linked to each other by thecross-linking at two sites other than the single bond, and thecross-linking comprises no double bond.
 10. An organicelectroluminescence device comprising: an anode; a cathode; a firstemitting layer and a second emitting layer disposed between the anodeand the cathode; and an electron transporting layer disposed between thecathode and the first and second emitting layers, wherein the electrontransporting layer comprises a compound represented by a formula (5A)below, the first emitting layer comprises a first host material in aform of a first compound represented by a formula (1) below, the firstcompound comprises at least one group represented by a formula (11)below, and the second emitting layer comprises a second host material ina form of a second compound represented by a formula (2) below,

where, in the formula (5A): X₅₁, X₅₂ and X₅₃ are each independently anitrogen atom or CR₅; at least one of X₅₁, X₅₂, and X₅₃ is a nitrogenatom; R₅ is a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, a substituted orunsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted orunsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a grouprepresented by —Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄),a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having to 50ring atoms; R₉₀₁ to R₉₀₄ are each independently a hydrogen atom, asubstituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms, asubstituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ring carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ringcarbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 50 ring atoms; when a plurality of R₉₀₁ are present, theplurality of R₉₀₁ are mutually the same or different; when a pluralityof R₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₂ are mutually the same ordifferent; when a plurality of R₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₃are mutually the same or different; and when a plurality of R₉₀₄ arepresent, the plurality of R₉₀₄ are mutually the same or different; Ax isa substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 18 ring carbonatoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to13 ring atoms; Bx is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6to 18 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclicgroup having 5 to 13 ring atoms; L₅ is a single bond, a substituted orunsubstituted (n+1)-valent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group having 6 to18 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted (n+1)-valentheterocyclic group having 5 to 13 ring atoms; n is 1, 2, or 3, when n is2 or 3, L₅ is not a single bond; Cx is each independently a substitutedor unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 60 ringatoms; and when a plurality of Cx are present, the plurality of Cx aremutually the same or different,

where, in the formula (1): R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ are each independently ahydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl grouphaving 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by—Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a grouprepresented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl grouphaving 7 to 50 carbon atoms, a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a grouprepresented by —COOR₈₀₂, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, asubstituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbonatoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50ring atoms, or the group represented by the formula (11); at least oneof R₁₀₁ to R₁₁₀ is the group represented by the formula (11); when aplurality of groups represented by the formula (11) are present, theplurality of groups represented by the formula (11) are mutually thesame or different; L₁₀₁ is a single bond, a substituted or unsubstitutedarylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or a substituted orunsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ring atoms;Ar₁₀₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ringcarbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 50 ring atoms; mx is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5; when two or moreL₁₀₁ are present, the two or more L₁₀₁ are mutually the same ordifferent; when two or more Ar₁₀₁ are present, the two or more Ar₁₀₁ aremutually the same or different; and * in the formula (11) represents abonding position to a pyrene ring represented by the formula (1);

where, in the formula (2): R₂₀₁ to R₂₀₈ are each independently ahydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted haloalkyl group having 1 to50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group having 2to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having2 to 50 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl grouphaving 3 to 50 ring carbon atoms, a group represented by—Si(R₉₀₁)(R₉₀₂)(R₉₀₃), a group represented by —O—(R₉₀₄), a grouprepresented by —S—(R₉₀₅), a group represented by —N(R₉₀₆)(R₉₀₇), asubstituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group having 7 to 50 carbon atoms,a group represented by —C(═O)R₈₀₁, a group represented by —COOR₈₀₂, ahalogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ringatoms; L₂₀₁ to L₂₀₂ are each independently a single bond, a substitutedor unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted divalent heterocyclic group having 5 to 50ring atoms; Ar₂₀₁ and Ar₂₀₂ are each independently a substituted orunsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50 ring carbon atoms, or asubstituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic group having 5 to 50 ringatoms; in the first compound represented by the formula (1) and thesecond compound represented by the formula (2), R₉₀₁, R₉₀₂, R₉₀₃, R₉₀₄,R₉₀₅, R₉₀₆, R₉₀₇, R₈₀₁ and R₈₀₂ are each independently a hydrogen atom,a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 50 carbon atoms,a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl group having 3 to 50 ringcarbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 50ring carbon atoms, or a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic grouphaving 5 to 50 ring atoms; when a plurality of R₉₀₁ are present, theplurality of R₉₀₁ are mutually the same or different; when a pluralityof R₉₀₂ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₂ are mutually the same ordifferent; when a plurality of R₉₀₃ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₃are mutually the same or different; when a plurality of R₉₀₄ arepresent, the plurality of R₉₀₄ are mutually the same or different; whena plurality of R₉₀₅ are present, the plurality of R₉₀₅ are mutually thesame or different; when a plurality of R₉₀₆ are present, the pluralityof R₉₀₆ are mutually the same or different; when a plurality of R₉₀₇ arepresent, the plurality of R₉₀₇ are mutually the same or different; whena plurality of R₈₀₁ are present, the plurality of R₈₀₁ are mutually thesame or different; and when a plurality of R₈₀₂ are present, theplurality of R₈₀₂ are mutually the same or different.
 11. The organicelectroluminescence device according to claim 1, wherein the compoundrepresented by the formula (5A) is a compound represented by a formula(50A) below,

where, in the formula (50A), Ax, Bx, Cx, L₅ and n represent the same asAx, Bx, Cx, L₅ and n defined in the formula (5A).
 12. The organicelectroluminescence device according to claim 1, wherein a substituentfor a “substituted or unsubstituted” group is at least one groupselected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 18carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 18 ring carbon atoms, and aheterocyclic group having 5 to 18 ring atoms.
 13. The organicelectroluminescence device according to claim 1, wherein a substituentfor a “substituted or unsubstituted” group is an alkyl group having 1 to5 carbon atoms.
 14. The organic electroluminescence device according toclaim 10, wherein in the first compound and the second compound, thegroups specified to be “substituted or unsubstituted” are each an“unsubstituted” group.
 15. An electronic device comprising the organicelectroluminescence device according to claim
 1. 16. The organicelectroluminescence device according to claim 10, wherein the firstemitting layer and the second emitting layer are in direct contact witheach other.
 17. The organic electroluminescence device according toclaim 10, wherein the second emitting layer is disposed between thefirst emitting layer and the cathode.
 18. The organicelectroluminescence device according to claim 1, wherein the firstemitting layer and the second emitting layer contain no phosphorescentmaterial.
 19. The organic electroluminescence device according to claim10, wherein the first emitting layer and the second emitting layercontain no phosphorescent material.
 20. The organic electroluminescencedevice according to claim 1, wherein the compound that is contained inthe first emitting layer and emits light having the maximum peakwavelength of 500 nm or less is a compound that emits light having amaximum peak wavelength of 480 nm or less; and the compound that iscontained in the second emitting layer and emits light having themaximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less is a compound that emits lighthaving a maximum peak wavelength of 480 nm or less.
 21. The organicelectroluminescence device according to claim 1, wherein the compoundthat is contained in the first emitting layer and emits light having themaximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less is a fifth compound thatfluoresces; and the compound that is contained in the second emittinglayer and emits light having the maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm orless is a fourth compound that fluoresces.
 22. The organicelectroluminescence device according to claim 10, wherein the compoundthat is contained in the first emitting layer and emits light having themaximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less is a compound that emits lighthaving a maximum peak wavelength of 480 nm or less; and the compoundthat is contained in the second emitting layer and emits light havingthe maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less is a compound that emitslight having a maximum peak wavelength of 480 nm or less.
 23. Theorganic electroluminescence device according to claim 10, wherein thecompound that is contained in the first emitting layer and emits lighthaving the maximum peak wavelength of 500 nm or less is a fifth compoundthat fluoresces; and the compound that is contained in the secondemitting layer and emits light having the maximum peak wavelength of 500nm or less is a fourth compound that fluoresces.